<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom">
  <title>Ceed blog</title>
  <subtitle>Notes on the money side of firms that sell their team’s time.</subtitle>
  <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog"/>
  <link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://ceed.so/blog/feed.xml"/>
  <id>https://ceed.so/blog</id>
  <updated>2026-10-01T13:00:00-07:00</updated>
  <rights>© 2026 YSecurity, LLC d/b/a Ceed</rights>
  <entry>
    <title>Bill rate. Pay rate.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate</id>
    <published>2026-10-01T13:00:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-10-01T13:00:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>The second person to log an hour to a client is often a contractor. The spread between the bill rate and the pay rate, markup against margin, the cash chain and the thirty-day freelance laws, New Jersey’s ABC test from 1 October 2026, the $2,000 1099, and the file a buyer will ask for. Not legal or tax advice.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;Today, 1 October 2026, New Jersey’s new rules on who counts as an independent contractor become operative. For most firms that sell their team’s time the date lands on a change that already happened, quietly, one hire at a time. The second person to log an hour to a client is often not an employee. Gusto counted in April that more than four in ten solopreneurs paid at least one contractor in 2025, about $72.3 billion between them, and our own home page says Ceed is for a firm “from the day a second person logs an hour to your client.” This post is about that day, and about the two numbers it creates.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The first is the bill rate, what the client pays for the hour. The second is the pay rate, what the person who worked the hour is paid for it. The gap between them is the firm’s margin, and in 2026 it has to cover more than it used to: a client who pays in forty days, a contractor the law says must be paid in thirty, a set of rules that decide whether the contractor is a contractor at all, and a file that a buyer, an auditor or a state agency will one day ask to see. We run a security consultancy, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/about"&gt;YSecurity&lt;/a&gt;, which describes itself as more than 45 operators who ran security at Apple, Robinhood and the NSA, and the question of how each person who logs an hour is paid, from which hours and at what rate, is the question Ceed was built to answer for us first.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;One line before the rest, because it matters: none of this is legal or tax advice. The rules differ by state and change often, and the right person to ask before you change how you pay anyone is your accountant or your attorney.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-supply"&gt;The partner left. The firm called.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Start with where the senior contractors came from, because in 2026 the answer is the top of the profession. On 24 April KPMG cut about 10% of its US audit partners, about 100 of some 1,400 partners and managing directors, after an early retirement programme fell short, Accounting Today reported after the Wall Street Journal. The firm’s statement: “Our audit business is strong, and this action reflects our ongoing commitment to sustaining audit quality and leading the profession into the future.” In May it cut about 400 advisory jobs as a “strategic realignment to ensure skills and capabilities are aligned with future demand”.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;FT Exclusive: KPMG is cutting about 10% of its audit partnership in the US, after years of failed attempts to urge the least productive partners to retire early.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@FT, Financial Times&lt;/b&gt; · 23 April 2026 · 241 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/FT/status/2047347949118615893"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The reaction was not about KPMG. Robert Sterling’s post the same evening reached 485,000 views, and the line people passed around was about seniority.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;KPMG is laying off 10% of their audit partners…&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;I’ll be blunt: If you work in front of a computer, your job isn’t safe.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;It doesn’t matter how senior you are (KPMG’s partners literally own the company).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@RobertMSterling, Robert Sterling&lt;/b&gt; · 23 April 2026 · 2,279 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/RobertMSterling/status/2047401016794972672"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;In London the same thinning happened at the promotion line. City AM reported on 27 April that EY UK made “only 34 promotions in 2025, a drop of nearly 70 per cent since 2022,” and Deloitte made “60 promotions last year, down from 124 at its peak three years earlier.” James Ransome of the recruiter Patrick Morgan told the paper he was “seeing a clear shift away from the traditional ‘job-for-life’ equity partnership model”, and a Companies House analysis in the same piece counted 346 equity partners among KPMG’s 833 and 606 among Deloitte’s 1,356. The Financial Times reported that KPMG and EY had moved some UK equity partners into salaried roles. Amanda Goodall, who tracks layoffs for a large audience, added the UK detail from KPMG’s internal announcement on 27 March: “440 roles in audit with the majority being assistant managers.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The consulting firms thinned their middle too. McKinsey went from about 45,100 people at the end of 2023 to about 40,000 by May 2025, and Bob Sternfels explained the shape in January: “We can grow in this part, the client-facing side, and we can shrink in this part and have aggregate growth.” Accenture booked about $865 million of business optimization costs in fiscal 2025, which it said “includes severance”, and Julie Sweet described the logic plainly: “where we don’t have a viable path for skilling, sort of exiting people so we can get more of the skills in we need.” Accenture reports its fiscal 2026 results today. TheStreet reported in April that Deloitte had cut paid time off by five to ten days, frozen its pension after 2026 and halved paid family leave from sixteen weeks to eight.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HU8el3qsiVU"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Why Deloitte, PwC, EY and KPMG Are Suddenly in Trouble. Hidden Ledger, 9 min, published 18 July 2026, 168,800 views. The squeeze on the four largest firms, told for a general audience. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HU8el3qsiVU"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Where the people went is the other half. MBO Partners published its State of Independence study on 28 September, three days ago, from a survey of 4,557 US adults in April, 2,063 of them independent: “The U.S. independent workforce reached a record 74.9 million people in 2026.” Full-time independents are up 114% since 2020 and are now 22% of all full-time US workers. “An estimated 5.8 million independent professionals now earn more than $100,000 annually, nearly double the number in 2020,” and “78% plan to remain independent or build a larger business.” Upwork’s index in July put the share of US skilled knowledge workers who freelance at 38%, up from 28%, and found 58% of full-time employees considering it, up from 36%.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/where-the-senior-contractors-came-from-partner-cuts-and-a-record-independent-workforce-2026.svg" width="640" height="496" alt="Six tiles. About 10 percent of KPMG’s US audit partners cut in April 2026, about 100 of 1,400. 34 partner promotions at EY UK in 2025, down nearly 70 percent since 2022, and 60 at Deloitte UK, down from 124. 74.9 million US independents in 2026, a record, with full-time independents up 114 percent since 2020. 5.8 million independent professionals earning more than 100,000 dollars a year, nearly double 2020. Fractional hiring up 149 percent year over year. C-suite interim engagements up 151 percent since 2021."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Where the seniors came from. Accounting Today, 24 April 2026. City AM, 27 April 2026. MBO Partners, State of Independence 2026, 28 September 2026. Fractional Jobs, 18 August 2026. Heidrick &amp;amp; Struggles, 2026 talent report.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The demand grew with the supply. Fractional Jobs reported on 18 August “a 149% year-over-year growth” in fractional hiring and “approximately 150,000 fractional professionals currently working in the US”, and its own report found 83% of them at director level or above, 87% with more than ten years of experience, an average of $223 an hour and a median of 21 client-facing hours a week. Taylor Crane, who runs it: “The fractional executive market has graduated from an interesting talent experiment into a full-fledged, measurable layer of the senior labor market.” Heidrick &amp;amp; Struggles, which owns Business Talent Group, counted “a 151% increase in C-suite engagements since 2021.” And Chad Oakley of the search firm Charles Aris said on Umbrex Unleashed that “It is now a candidate-driven market.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EBjX65XN620"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;485. KPMG Lays Off 10% Audit Partners, Best AI Still Fails 1/5 Accounting Tasks. The Accounting Podcast, 50 min, published 29 April 2026, 2,264 views. Blake Oliver and David Leary on the week the partners left. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EBjX65XN620"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two caveats. The pyramid is not dying at the giants, which are rebuilding its base while they cut its middle: McKinsey planned about 12% more hires in North America for 2026, according to Storyboard18, and Bain told Poets&amp;amp;Quants its coming summer class was its “second largest summer associate class ever”. PwC’s own paper on the workforce of the future describes “a small leadership team, a strong middle layer, and a narrow base of new talent,” because “AI agents can take on many entry-level tasks.” And independence does not pay better on average. Upwork’s own figures have skilled full-time employees earning more than skilled freelancers in 2025, $109,000 against $101,000. What changed is not that everyone wants to be a contractor. It is that a boutique of eight can now find a former Big Four manager, a McKinsey alumna or a former CISO who will work two days a week, and the partners and managers the large firms shed have become the senior bench of the small ones.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="not-so-solo"&gt;Not so solo.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firms buying that bench are small, and most of them start with one person. Gusto’s “Not So Solo” report, from its own payroll data, found that “More than four in ten solopreneurs (43.5%) paid at least one contractor during 2025”, 61% of those engaged two or more, contractors typically took about a tenth of revenue, and about a quarter of these businesses spent more than a quarter of revenue on them. The median relationship lasted five months. A year earlier Gusto had found that 34% of new solopreneurs hired a contractor in their first year. The second person at a consultancy, a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO practice&lt;/a&gt;, a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security boutique&lt;/a&gt; or an &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agency&lt;/a&gt; is very often a 1099.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;At the senior end the contract has a standard shape, and it is usually a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;flat monthly fee&lt;/a&gt; sized in hours only the firm knows. Fractional Jobs’ own guidance says that “Almost all fractional contracts are versions of Independent Contractor agreements (1099s)”, “usually month-to-month, with clearly defined hours (e.g. 10 per week), a monthly retainer or hourly rate,” and a notice period of fifteen to thirty days. Taylor Crane set the benchmark in February: “The gold standard for a fractional executive is a retainer for $10,000 per month for approximately 10 hours per week of work.” And Upwork’s figures say that “63% of freelancers typically work with several organizations at once,” which is exactly what makes them contractors in the eyes of most tests.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“A Fractional exec that charges a $10,000 monthly retainer would cost about $25,000 / month if you hired them full-time.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;“We don’t take a markup on their rates.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;cite&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.linkedin.com/posts/taylorcrane_how-much-fractional-executives-actually-cost-activity-7429201119370698753-sF-W"&gt;Taylor Crane, founder of Fractional Jobs, on LinkedIn&lt;/a&gt;, 16 February 2026, 295 reactions.&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;That post also said the quiet part about why the arrangement exists: with a fractional executive “you don’t pay payroll taxes, health benefits, bonuses, etc.” The contractor prices that in. James Shore, the author and consultant, gave the rule most independents use in a Hacker News thread on Crane’s launch in August 2025: “General rule of thumb for independent contracting is that you should take the annual salary you would normally make and chop off the zeroes to get the hourly rate. So 150K/yr becomes $150/hr.” His reason: “That’s about double the yearly salary and pays for your increased costs (payroll tax, healthcare, retirement, vacation) as well as your bench time between jobs.” In the same thread the-alchemist was less impressed with the market’s side of it: “They don’t pay much. $5k-$6k/mo for half time.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LxlV9_lVx48"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Start a Fractional CFO Firm in 2026. The CFO Report, 10 min, published 9 December 2025, 2,692 views. A solo practice turning into a firm, which is where person number two arrives. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=LxlV9_lVx48"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;From the other side, the market for subcontracting through a firm is well understood by the people in it. natbennett, in the Hacker News thread “A layoff fundamentally changed how I perceive work”, which reached 1,041 points in January 2025, gave the route: “The easiest way is to reach out to consulting companies and ask if they take subcontractors. Second easiest is to ask companies that want to hire you if they’ll take you as a contractor instead.” baobabKoodaa described how consultancies use them: “they try to fill positions from their bench, and when they are unable, they subcontract to other consultancies or freelancers.” That is the shape of a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/staff-augmentation"&gt;staff augmentation&lt;/a&gt; firm, an &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/it-consulting"&gt;IT consultancy&lt;/a&gt; or a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;software shop&lt;/a&gt; in 2026: a principal or two, a few employees, and senior contractors who come and go with the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T26F1W7m-jM"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The Hybrid Model: Best Consulting Business Model? Consulting Success, 8 min, published 11 November 2020, 39,000 views. Consulting Success on the model between a solo practice and a firm. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=T26F1W7m-jM"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-arithmetic"&gt;Markup is not margin.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The bill rate and the pay rate make one spread, and people describe it two ways. Markup is the spread divided by the pay rate. Margin is the spread divided by the bill rate. A contractor paid $150 and billed at $250 is a 67% markup and a 40% margin, and the difference matters because owners price in markup and live on margin. The Economist’s question in October 2024, whether McKinsey and its rivals had got too big, drew 179 comments on Hacker News, and the employees of the big firms described their own multiple. candiddevmike: “The economics of consulting are pretty raw: they basically arbitrage the hourly rate of folks. They pay you X and then bill you for X*1.3 (minimum).” whatever1: “More likely they pay you X and they charge 3X, but yes I agree.” jncfhnb: “I’m pretty sure my average multiple is 6x.” FredPret: “3x is standard, you should push for a 2x raise.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/markup-is-not-margin-seven-spreads-between-bill-rate-and-pay-rate.svg" width="640" height="406" alt="A ladder of seven spreads, each shown as markup and as gross margin on a contractor with no payroll burden: 30 percent markup is 23.1 percent margin, 50 percent is 33.3, the firm keeping 35 percent of billings is a 54 percent markup, bill 250 and pay 150 is 67 percent and 40, bill 400 and pay 150 in Ceed’s demo account is 167 percent and 62.5, three times is 200 percent and 66.7, six times is 500 percent and 83.3. On a W-2 temp a 50 percent markup is about 24 to 27 percent once payroll burden is counted."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Markup is not margin. The Hacker News multiples, October 2024. Liz Steblay on what boutiques keep, January 2025. LevelCFO’s staffing benchmarks, April 2026. The rest is our arithmetic.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;For a firm that places contractors, the practitioners’ numbers cluster. Liz Steblay, who coaches independent consultants, wrote in January 2025 that “Traditional agencies and boutique firms typically take 30-50% of your billings (the average is 35%)” and that “Online platforms usually charge 20-30%.” David Zhao of Codastrat put the consulting networks at 20% to 30% “or more”. Victor Valentine Romo’s worked example in February: “You charge client: $200/hour. You pay subcontractor: $80-$100/hour. Your gross margin: $100-$120/hour (50-60%)”, and he advises against anything below 30%. Staffing firms work on thinner spreads because they carry the payroll: the Staffing Industry Analysts median gross margin for US IT temporary staffing reached 25.6% in 2021, and LevelCFO’s benchmark is the one every owner should keep in view, “A 50% markup is roughly 24-27% burdened gross margin, NOT the ~33% the unburdened spread implies.” On a contractor there is no payroll burden, so the same 50% is a 33% margin. On a W-2 temp it is a quarter.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UsFT-YO0edY"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Contractor Markup V. Margin Simply Explained. Contractor Growth Network, 5 min, published 14 April 2022, 18,800 views. Made for building contractors, and the arithmetic is the same for a firm that bills hours. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UsFT-YO0edY"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The spread is not profit, and Umbrex, a network of former McKinsey, Bain and BCG consultants, says why in one sentence: “The difference is not automatically profit because the rate must cover the full cost of employment, firm operations, and commercial risk.” For a salaried consultant the full cost of employment is larger than the salary, and it runs through the weeks nobody bills. The Bureau of Labor Statistics’ employer cost survey for June 2026 put the total cost of a management or professional worker in private industry at $78.88 an hour worked, of which $54.06 was wages and $24.82, or 31.5%, was benefits, about 46 cents of benefits for every wage dollar. SPI Research found that “Billable utilization fell to 66.4% in 2025, the lowest in SPI Research’s survey history and well below the 75% target.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/what-one-billed-hour-costs-salaried-consultant-against-a-contractor-2026.svg" width="640" height="360" alt="Two bars. A salaried consultant on 150,000 dollars costs about 219,000 dollars a year with benefits and bills about 1,381 hours at 66.4 percent utilization, about 158 dollars of cost per billed hour. A contractor at 150 dollars an hour costs 150 dollars per billed hour and nothing for the unbilled week. Benefits are 31.5 percent of compensation for management and professional workers, BLS, June 2026, and utilization was 66.4 percent in 2025, SPI Research."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What a billed hour costs. Bureau of Labor Statistics, Employer Costs for Employee Compensation, June 2026, released 9 September 2026. SPI Research via Deltek, 30 July 2026. The arithmetic is ours and approximate, because paid leave sits inside both the benefits and the unbilled hours.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Put the two together and a consultant on a $150,000 salary costs the firm about $219,000 a year and bills about 1,381 hours of 2,080, about $158 of cost for every hour the client pays for. A contractor who prices by James Shore’s rule, $150 an hour for a $150,000 salary, costs $150 per billed hour and nothing in the weeks between clients. The rates look almost the same. The difference is who carries the bench, and for a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/defense-contractors"&gt;defense contractor&lt;/a&gt; or an &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/engineering-firms"&gt;engineering firm&lt;/a&gt; billing a government client, who carries the audit of those hours too. Rob Black, who built Fractional CISO, wrote down the lesson every firm of eight learns once: hiring ahead of the work, when the firm is missing its revenue plan, “does NOT work”. That is why the second person is so often a contractor, and why the third and fourth are too, until the work is steady enough to carry a salary through a slow month.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;David Maister’s ratio of juniors to partners explains the other half, the part a contractor-heavy firm gives up. Matt Alexander of Collective 54 summarized it in December: “The more junior professionals a partner could supervise and bill, the greater the profit per partner.” A boutique of principals and senior 1099s has little of that ratio, since every senior hour costs close to what it bills, and its margin comes from the spread on each hour rather than from a pyramid of juniors. Alexander’s argument is that the tools are becoming the new juniors: “Where human leverage scaled linearly with headcount, AI leverage scales exponentially with data.” Will Hinde, formerly of West Monroe and Accenture, told Consulting Success in August that “the winners have to show up differently and be architected differently, not just find efficiencies but revamp delivery itself.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed’s demo account the numbers are simple on purpose. Acme Co is billed at $400 an hour, Tomás is paid $150, and forty approved hours in September make a $16,000 invoice, $6,000 of people cost and a 62.5% cash margin. That is a 167% markup, above the big firms’ “3X” and below jncfhnb’s six. The point is not the level. It is that both numbers come from the same forty hours, and the margin is known before the month ends, which we wrote about in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved#margin-per-client"&gt;margin per client, this morning&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-cash-chain"&gt;Paid in thirty days. By law.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The spread has a second job that no price list shows: it has to carry the time between paying the contractor and being paid by the client. Intuit QuickBooks’ 2026 late payments report, from about 5,000 owners a quarter and a December survey of 1,305, found that “Nearly 3 in 5 businesses (59%) have invoices overdue by 30+ days, up from 47% last year”, that businesses with unpaid invoices are owed $17,700 on average, that “42% say outside pressures delayed payments they owed to their own contractors, suppliers, or vendors,” and that “39% say one late payment made it hard to cover payroll or bills in the past year.” Xero’s data had US small businesses waiting 29.3 days to be paid in the June quarter, up from 28.6, and paid 8.5 days late.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/the-cash-chain-late-clients-above-thirty-day-contractors-below-2026.svg" width="640" height="366" alt="Four tiles. 59 percent of small businesses have invoices overdue by 30 days or more, up from 47 percent a year earlier. US small businesses waited 29.3 days on average to be paid in the June quarter of 2026, 8.5 days late. 42 percent say outside pressures delayed payments they owed to their own contractors, suppliers or vendors. 39 percent say one late payment made it hard to cover payroll or bills in the past year."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The cash chain. Intuit QuickBooks, 2026 Small Business Late Payments Report, 7 July 2026. Xero Small Business Insights, June quarter 2026, 30 July 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Dean Kaplan, who runs a collection agency, named the squeeze in April. At the top, he wrote of agencies, large clients push terms of 60 to 120 days and routinely pay late, and it applies to any firm that sells time. His next sentence is the one that has changed in the last three years: “At the bottom, they increasingly face 30-day legal obligations to pay contractors and risk double-damage penalties if they do not.” What firms do in the gap is not a secret either: “agencies slow payment to vendors and freelancers where they can.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;On Hacker News in April, an owner asked how others handle clients who do not pay on time, and the answers were the cash chain from the inside. Dustin Getz, the founder of Hyperfiddle: “If payments are slowing down and tardiness is increasing, they are not being forgetful, THEY ARE RUNNING OUT OF MONEY,” or “their customer is delinquent and they are aligning payments to transfer that risk to you.” michaelt: “If your contact can’t get a $500 invoice paid, then you’re not talking to someone with the authority to spend $500,000.” SteveStavros: “Switched to requiring 50% upfront for any new client work. Lost a couple of prospects but completely eliminated late payment issues.” And a consultant of twenty years, apercu, described the client every firm has: “there’s a hardcore 10% that will stretch you and stretch you because they can (I’m talking about paying NET 60/90 when the contractual agreement is NET 30).”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The law now sits under the contractor’s side of that chain in four large places. New York State’s Freelance Isn’t Free Act, in force since 28 August 2024, covers a freelancer hired for $800 or more, “Either by itself or when aggregated with all contracts for services between the same hiring party and freelance worker during the immediately preceding one hundred twenty days.” It requires payment on the date in the contract or, if the contract names none, “no later than thirty days after the completion of the freelance worker’s services”, forbids making timely payment conditional on the freelancer accepting less, requires the hiring party to keep the contract “for a period of no less than six years”, and entitles the freelancer to “double damages”. New York City has had its own law since 2017, with “the right to a written contract, the right to be paid timely and in full, and the right to be free of retaliation.” Illinois’ Freelance Worker Protection Act, since 1 July 2024, covers work of $500 or more over 120 days on the same thirty-day default, and its labor department received 24 complaints in the first year, 15 of them alleging late or no payment. California’s law, since 1 January 2025, covers professional services of $250 or more, with a thirty-day default, four years of record keeping and “recovery of up to twice the unpaid amount”. Los Angeles’ ordinance, since 24 April 2023, covers $600 or more in a calendar year, “no later than 30 calendar days after services are rendered,” with damages “up to twice the amount that remains unpaid.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/the-thirty-day-laws-freelance-payment-new-york-illinois-california-los-angeles-2026.svg" width="640" height="442" alt="A table of four freelance payment laws. New York State, since 28 August 2024: 800 dollars or more, alone or over 120 days, paid by the contract date or 30 days after the work, double damages. Illinois, since 1 July 2024: 500 dollars or more over 120 days, same deadline, a complaint to the state labor department. California, since 1 January 2025: 250 dollars or more, same deadline, up to twice the unpaid amount. Los Angeles, since 24 April 2023: 600 dollars or more in a calendar year, 30 days after the services, up to twice the unpaid amount."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The thirty-day laws. New York General Business Law Article 44-A. Illinois Department of Labor. Gunderson Dettmer on California’s SB 988. The Los Angeles Freelance Worker Protections Ordinance. Read 28 September 2026. Not legal advice.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_6D2WUXqc4"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What is the Freelance Isn’t Free Act? Rafael Espinal (Freelancers Union) Explains. Worksome, 1 min, published 2 August 2024, 129 views. The executive director of the Freelancers Union on the law his members fought for. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_6D2WUXqc4"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The obvious defense is a clause that pays the contractor when the client pays the firm. In construction, where these clauses were argued out, New York’s highest court held in 1995 that “Pay-when-paid provisions are void and unenforceable as contrary to public policy,” as Phillips Lytle summarizes West-Fair Electric v. Aetna, and California’s Supreme Court voided pay-if-paid clauses in 1997 in Wm. R. Clarke Corp. v. Safeco, calling them “contrary to the public policy of this state”. Siteline lists California, Delaware, Massachusetts, New York, North Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia and Wisconsin as states that void pay-if-paid. That is construction law, tied to lien rights, and how far it reaches a consulting subcontract is unsettled. What is settled is New York’s freelance statute, which requires the contract to state “the date on which the hiring party must pay” or “the mechanism by which such date will be determined”. Whether a clause keyed to the client’s payment meets that is a question for your attorney. The safer design is not to need one: bill the client from the same approved hours the contractor is paid from, on the same day, so the firm’s float is as short as the client allows. Catalant, the consulting marketplace, advertises the version it can offer, paying consultants “from the date of the client’s approval”.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VSnesCiQ6vY"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;California Freelance Ain’t Free Act. What Independent Contractors Need to Know. Talbert Law Office, 6 min, published 2 October 2024, 229 views. California’s version of the thirty-day rule, from a lawyer’s desk. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VSnesCiQ6vY"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;We wrote in August that &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/late-paying-clients#the-invoice-was-late-first"&gt;the invoice was late first&lt;/a&gt;, and for a firm with contractors the point is sharper. Every day between the end of the work and the invoice is a day the firm finances its contractor out of its own cash, with a thirty-day clock running in four jurisdictions and a contract clause the law may not honor. The invoice that goes out on the first of the month, from hours already approved, is the cheapest working capital a small firm has.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="new-jersey"&gt;Today, in New Jersey.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;New Jersey’s Department of Labor adopted its rules on the ABC test on 5 May 2026, and “The new rules will be operative on October 1, 2026.” They apply to the state’s Unemployment Compensation Law, its Wage and Hour Law and its Wage Payment Law, and Blank Rome noted on LinkedIn that the test also governs the state’s earned sick leave and temporary disability benefits laws, “a practical reach far broader than similar regulations in most other states.” The sentence that decides most cases is the one about who proves what: “To be classified as an independent contractor under New Jersey law, the putative employer has the burden of proof to meet all three prongs of the ABC test.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The Department’s own page puts the test the other way round, with employment as the default: a worker “should be considered an employee unless all the following circumstances apply.” Prong A, the worker “has been and will continue to be free from control or direction over the performance of work performed, both under contract of service and in fact.” Prong B, “The work is either outside the usual course of the business for which such service is performed, or the work is performed outside of all the places of business of the enterprise.” Prong C, the worker “is customarily engaged in an independently established trade, occupation, profession or business.” Its guidance lists what is not enough on its own: registering a business, carrying insurance, holding a professional license, having other clients. Morgan Lewis read it the same way in May: “holding a professional license, having multiple employers, registering a business entity, receiving a 1099 tax form, or carrying insurance are not individually sufficient.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/bill-rate-pay-rate/the-abc-test-new-jersey-october-2026-what-a-consultancy-has-to-prove.svg" width="640" height="427" alt="Three boxes for the three prongs of New Jersey’s ABC test, operative 1 October 2026. A, no control: free from control or direction over the work, under the contract and in fact. B, outside the usual course, highlighted as the hard one for a consultancy: outside the usual course of the firm’s business, or outside all its places of business, and a home office is not one of them. C, a business of their own. Below: the firm proves all three; not enough on its own are a professional license, a registered business, a 1099, insurance or other clients; if it fails, up to 5 percent of the worker’s gross earnings over 12 months, 250 dollars a worker then 1,000, and stop-work orders."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Three prongs, all of them. New Jersey Department of Labor, 5 May 2026, its page on independent contractors and its guidance on the ABC test. Not legal advice.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;For a consultancy, prong B is the hard one. A consultant hired to deliver consulting is inside the usual course of a consulting firm’s business, which Saul Ewing described in June as including “activities that the putative employer regularly engages in to generate revenue or develop, produce, sell, market, or provide goods or services.” The other route through prong B is that the work is done outside all of the firm’s places of business, which Ogletree read as “locations where the enterprise has a physical plant or conducts an integral part of its business,” adding that a remote worker’s “personal residence where they perform remote work…shall not be considered among the putative employer’s places of business.” That helps a contractor who works from home. It helps less a contractor who works at the client’s site beside the firm’s own people, and it does nothing for the first route. Douglas Nelson, an attorney, put the result in a sentence on 12 September: “A delivery business cannot easily treat drivers as contractors, and a consulting firm cannot easily do so with consultants.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The penalties are real enough to plan around. The Department lists “Up to 5 percent of the worker’s gross earnings over the past 12 months as a penalty,” along with a “Stop work order, the suspension or revocation of any one or more licenses held by the employer.” Porter Thomas Grabell &amp;amp; Baumwoll summarized the per-worker penalties in August as “up to $250 per misclassified worker for a first violation and up to $1,000 per worker for subsequent violations,” in a piece on the state’s July settlement with STG Logistics, $2.775 million in all. Duane Morris told employers on 25 September to audit their contractor relationships before today, and Richard Reibstein, who writes a blog on independent contractor compliance, called the final version “one of the most business-unfriendly tests for IC status in the country.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“Codification of this rule by the NJ Department of Labor will continue to make NJ an unfriendly place for businesses to call home.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;cite&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.linkedin.com/posts/john-l-shahdanian-ii-esq-7ba4506_the-abc-test-for-independent-contractors-activity-7465390180934283264-OTpQ"&gt;John L. Shahdanian II, an employment attorney, on LinkedIn&lt;/a&gt;, 27 May 2026.&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;The other side has its say. The acting labor commissioner, Kevin D. Jarvis, said of the final rule, “We heard from New Jersey’s business community and workers,” and a law firm headlined its summary “A Measured Retreat, Not a Reset.” The final text changed from the 2025 proposal after the comments, the Department says. It kept the burden on the firm. NJ Spotlight News asked in August 2025 whether the state’s gig workers would be hurt by it, and the arguments in that report are the same ones a consultancy will hear from its own contractors this autumn.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ghHoAm1hohQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Will NJ’s gig workers be hurt by new state rule? NJ Spotlight News, 5 min, published 6 August 2025, 770 views. New Jersey public media on the rule before it was final. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ghHoAm1hohQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-rules"&gt;The rest of the map.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;New Jersey is the news today, and it is not alone. California’s ABC test has a business-to-business exemption with twelve conditions, and the third is the one a consultancy that places a contractor with its client runs into: the provider must provide services “directly to the hiring entity rather [than] to its customers”, in the Labor Commissioner’s words. The professional services exemption lists fields such as marketing, graphic design and grant writing, and management consulting is not on it. Consulting appears in the referral agency exemption. Licensed attorneys, architects, engineers, private investigators and accountants are exempt on their own terms, which matters to &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/law-firms"&gt;law firms&lt;/a&gt; and accounting practices, and where an exemption applies the older Borello test decides. Massachusetts reads its second prong strictly: “A worker whose services form a regular and continuing part of the employer’s business should be found to be an employee,” in the Attorney General’s advisory, which also notes that the statute “authorizes the Attorney General to impose substantial civil and criminal penalties.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nP17qb4M8cc"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The ABC test for independent contractors under California law. The Legal Lineup with Anthony Zaller, 6 min, published 17 May 2018, 16,000 views. The three prongs as California applied them first. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nP17qb4M8cc"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The federal test is loosening, and it is still a proposal. The Department of Labor announced its proposed rule on 26 February 2026, the comment period closed on 28 April, and on 28 September a Federal Register search returned only the proposal. It rests on two core factors, “the nature and degree of the worker’s control over the work” and “the worker’s opportunity for profit or loss based on initiative and/or investment”, and the SBA’s Office of Advocacy estimated it would save small businesses $2.31 billion over ten years. Eighteen states wrote in April that under it “more employers would classify workers as independent contractors.” And the Department’s own answer to the question every New Jersey firm will ask: the rule “has no effect on those state wage-and-hour laws that use a more restrictive test, such as the ‘ABC’ test applied in California and New Jersey.” The strictest test that applies to a worker is the one that applies.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The tax side changed in January. “For payments made in 2026, the reporting threshold is $2,000,” where it had been $600, and the Internal Revenue Service will adjust it for inflation from 2027. Backup withholding moved to the same threshold. The forms for 2026 are due by 31 January, which in 2027 is a Sunday, so the due date is Monday, 1 February 2027. Payments to a corporation, including an LLC taxed as a C or S corporation, generally still need no form, with exceptions such as attorneys’ fees. None of it changes three things: the W-9 you collect before the first payment, the fact that the income is taxable whether or not a form is filed, and the IRS’s own test of who is a contractor, which asks about behavioral control, financial control and the relationship, and which a firm or a worker can ask the IRS to decide with Form SS-8. Form 1099-K, for payments through card processors and payment apps, is back to its old threshold, payments to a payee above $20,000 in more than 200 transactions.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K6vb8yPpp4Y"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Did You Pay A Contractor In 2026? You Might Owe The IRS A 1099-NEC Form. Jamie Trull, 13 min, published 14 January 2026, 831 views. A CPA on the new threshold and what did not change with it. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K6vb8yPpp4Y"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Across the Atlantic, the United Kingdom’s off-payroll rules follow the client’s size, and the new small-company thresholds of more than £15 million of turnover and £7.5 million of balance sheet first change a client’s status in the 2027 to 2028 tax year, by HMRC’s own manual. A small client in the private sector does not decide a contractor’s status at all. A &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/global-consulting"&gt;global consulting firm&lt;/a&gt; with contractors in both countries lives under both calendars.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-file"&gt;The file they will ask for.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Every one of these rules ends in the same request, from a buyer, an auditor or a state, and it is for a file. CT Acquisitions, which advises consulting firms on their sale, tells owners that buyers look for sub-consultant capacity “under 15% of delivery hours done by 1099”, with a “documented classification rationale”, and warns that owners “find out 90 days into diligence that their adjusted EBITDA is 25% to 50% lower than what their tax returns show”. The Defense Contract Audit Agency’s guidance to contractors says why hours need a record of their own: “Unlike other costs, labor is not supported by external documentation or physical evidence to provide an independent check or balance.” New York wants the freelance contract kept six years, California and Los Angeles four, and New Jersey leaves the burden of proof with the firm, which in practice means the file.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The file is not long. The signed contract, with the payment date or the mechanism for it. The W-9. The contractor’s invoices or payout statements. The hours, tied to the client work they were for, with a description a stranger could read. Proof of payment and its date. And a short written rationale for the classification, prong by prong where a state uses the ABC test. The operators who check contractor hours for a living want the same thing in their own words. Shawn Jahromi, who runs a management consulting firm, told Clockify: “When an invoice arrives, we check alignment between story, tickets, and calendar, not minutes.” Guillermo Triana, who runs a professional employer organization, halved his review time by asking contractors to replace a vague “marketing” with entries like “2.3 hrs → wrote 800-word email series → launch 12/4”. And the contractors want to see it too. In Buddy Punch’s 2025 survey of 534 workers, 47% wanted “access to their own time tracking records”, and 30% said time tracking “feels like surveillance”.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IiGI8YSmoJ4"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How To 1099 Someone. How Do I Create, Send, File 1099s for Independent Contractors from my Business. Ginny Silver, California Small Business Coach, 4 min, published 23 January 2022, 131,600 views. The mechanics, before the threshold moved. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IiGI8YSmoJ4"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="their-side"&gt;The other side of the invoice.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The contractor has a case against all of this, and the strongest version of it comes from the Economic Policy Institute, which wrote in April that “Workers misclassified as independent contractors also must assume the full financial cost of Social Security and Medicare contributions, rather than split it evenly with their employer,” and lose unemployment insurance and workers’ compensation with it. Put bluntly, part of a firm’s margin on a 1099 can be the worker’s lost benefits. That is true, and it is the point of New Jersey’s rule. A contractor who works like staff, on the firm’s core service, under the firm’s direction, is what New Jersey, Massachusetts and California treat as an employee, and a firm that builds its margin on that arrangement has built it on a liability.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;How America Built a 1099 System Designed to Exploit Drivers&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The problem is the massive gray zone between W-2 employees and legitimate independent contractors, where carriers have created classification schemes designed to evade employment law while maintaining complete control over drivers.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@RobCarpenter, Rob Carpenter&lt;/b&gt; · 2 February 2026 · 34 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/RobCarpenter/status/2018376592494354466"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The senior independents in this post mostly chose the life, and they price the bench in themselves. MBO found 78% planning to stay independent or build a larger business, and James Shore’s rule doubles the salary for a reason. The firm’s spread has to pay for something the contractor could not get alone, and when it does not, the contractor notices. On Hacker News in February ethbr1 said what many subcontractors think of the firm in the middle, “Often agencies are just skimming their percentage without adding real value to the project,” and then, in the same comment, what the client is actually buying: “This is actually what most VPs are paying for: being able to pick up a phone and chew IBM GCS, TCS, CG, etc. out when the schedule slips.” Liz Steblay calls subcontracting “a stepping stone rather than a long-term strategy”. The spread pays for the client, the sale, the accountability and, under the thirty-day laws, the float.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Fractional work has its critics among buyers too. In an August thread on hiring a fractional team, kypro wrote that “issues which could be resolved in hours by a team that’s full-time tend to drag on for days with a fractional workforce,” and make_it_sure that the fractional hires they tried “performed much much worse than a dedicated full time hire.” A fractional CFO in the same thread, desktopentree, drew the line that matches our experience: “Fractional service works for functions that are judgment-dense and cadence-light.” A principal with senior contractors fits advisory work and short, expert engagements, the shape of most &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/advisors"&gt;professional advisors&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/data-ai-consultancies"&gt;data and AI consultancies&lt;/a&gt;. It does not fit every kind of delivery, and the record of hours and margin per client is how a firm finds out which kind it is doing.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EW-lnxIZ6qg"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;ACCOUNTANT EXPLAINS Why 1099 Income Is Better Than W-2 For Taxes. Sherman, My CPA Coach, 11 min, published 1 April 2024, 110,100 views. The contractor’s side of the ledger, as a tax adviser tells it to independents. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EW-lnxIZ6qg"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="in-ceed"&gt;One set of hours. Two rates.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Everything above turns on one fact about a firm with contractors. The same hour appears twice, once on the client’s invoice at the bill rate and once on the contractor’s statement at the pay rate. When the two are computed from different records, a timesheet here and a spreadsheet there, the firm has two versions of the month and a reconciliation to do before anyone is paid. This is the part of a firm Ceed keeps.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A person logs an hour once, against the client’s budget, from one Slack reminder a day, and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#follows"&gt;the invoice, the payouts, the margin and the close&lt;/a&gt; all come from that entry. The client’s invoice is computed from the agreement at the client’s rate by tier. The contractor’s statement is computed from the same approved entries at the contractor’s own rate. There is no second record to reconcile against, because there is no second record.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="One month of one client, at the bill rate and at the pay rate"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Acme Co&lt;/b&gt; · September · 40 h approved&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Computed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Invoice · 40 h at $400.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$16,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Tomás Aguilar’s statement · 40 h at $150.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$6,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Cash margin · 62.5%&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$10,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;Both lines from the same forty approved hours. The client sees the first, Tomás sees the second, and the owners see all three.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;A contractor who works for two clients gets one statement from the hours both invoices used. This is the card on our home page, from the demo account, and it is the whole idea in four lines.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A payout statement computed from the same hours"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Maya R.&lt;/b&gt; · payout · August&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Computed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Acme Co · 38.5 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$5,775.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Juniper Robotics · 62 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$9,300.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Owed · 30 Sep&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$15,075.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;The same 100.5 hours the two invoices used. Your payment rail moves the money.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Each person sees their own record. The contractor logging an hour in Ceed sees their own hours and their own pay for the day, the thing 47% of Buddy Punch’s respondents asked for, and nothing about anyone else’s. Rates and margin are visible only to the owners and the people they name, enforced on the server, and the client sees what the agreement puts on the invoice, as the home page says under &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#fee"&gt;the client sees the fee&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/held-not-hidden/time-tracking-log-slack-reminder-month-complete-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="479" alt="Ceed’s Time tracking page: You’ve logged 0.0 h today, your pay is $0. A form with Logging for, Partner, Date, Start, End, Duration and Description, a Log it button, scope buttons for Today, Month and Year, a note reading Done logging the month? Accounts you worked can invoice only after everyone on them says so, with a button My month is complete, and a line reading If you’re allocated on a partner this month, Slack reminds you when today is still empty."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What the person logging sees. Ceed’s Time tracking page on staging, September 2026: one form, their own pay for the day, and the button that tells the firm their month is complete. The accounts they worked can invoice only after everyone on them says so.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The cash chain gets shorter. The month cannot invoice until everyone who worked on an account has marked their month complete, the invoice waits as a draft until an owner approves it, and then it freezes. The hours approved in September can be on September’s invoice on the first of October and on the contractor’s statement the same day, so the float between paying the contractor and being paid by the client starts at the client’s terms and not at the firm’s paperwork. And the hour that would push a client past its budget &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#approvals"&gt;waits for a person’s yes or no&lt;/a&gt;, so the question of who pays for it is answered on the day, with a name on it, and not at the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The file keeps itself. Every change is on an append-only trail with the actor, the action and the value before and after, closed months do not change, and the dated work beneath each invoice is the record of hours tied to client work that a buyer, an auditor or a state will ask for. The month close lists what is still open, held hours included, before it records the month as final.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/activity-append-only-held-to-approved-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="372" alt="Ceed’s Activity page, headed Every change, forever, append-only: actor, action, before and after. Two rows for Acme Co by Jon: a time entry changed from 42 booked hours and held to 44 and approved, and a time entry added with its description, hours and status."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The file, kept as it happens. Ceed’s Activity page on staging, September 2026: every change, forever, with the actor, the action, and the value before and after.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/month-close-readiness-open-items-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="302" alt="Ceed’s month close readiness panel for a demo firm: three open items, each closing as a recorded decision. Approvals queue, one open, held hours and requests freeze as is. Cap positions, every account within cap. A delivery score rule, one account with no score. Invoices, all final. Receivables, nothing overdue. Next month’s book, nothing booked."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Before the month becomes a record. Ceed’s close readiness panel on staging, September 2026: the open approvals, the caps, the invoices and the receivables on one list, each closing as a recorded decision.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Bringing the people in is a reading, not a data entry job. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#intelligence"&gt;Ceed Intelligence&lt;/a&gt; reads a firm’s people list, its W-2s and 1099s, its client list and the agreements it signed, and proposes the people, the contractors, the clients and the budgets it found. The firm confirms them all at once or row by row, every record it added says so, and the rates and other money terms wait for a yes one by one.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The money moves where it moves today. Your bank and your payroll provider pay your people, and Ceed never touches the money. And the second person costs nothing to add. Ceed is &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#price"&gt;0.1% of what you invoice&lt;/a&gt;, with no seats and no minimum, so person number two and person number nine log their first hour on the same terms. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;Where Ceed stands beside the time trackers and the suites&lt;/a&gt; is on the comparison page, and we went through the row on payouts and commissions in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement#the-people"&gt;Ten rows. One engagement.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Six books, two on the economics of a firm of experts, three from the independent’s side, and one on the cash between them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0684834316"&gt;Managing the Professional Service Firm&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David H. Maister, 1993. The economics of a firm of experts, including the ratio of juniors to partners, which a boutique of principals and senior contractors turns inside out.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0814437338"&gt;The Gig Economy&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Diane Mulcahy, 2016. The independent’s own arithmetic: the bench, the benefits, and the rate that has to pay for both.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0446678791"&gt;Free Agent Nation&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Daniel H. Pink, 2001. The first account of the free agent as a class, twenty-five years before MBO counted 74.9 million of them.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/076116488X"&gt;The Freelancer’s Bible&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Sara Horowitz with Toni Sciarra Poynter, 2012. The Freelancers Union founder’s manual for the contractor’s side, contracts and getting paid included, and the lineage of the laws in this post.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/019879701X"&gt;Humans as a Service&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jeremias Prassl, 2018. The legal case for treating much contract work as employment, the strongest book against the arrangement this post describes.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/073521414X"&gt;Profit First&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Mike Michalowicz, 2017. Cash management for small firms, which is the cash chain seen from the owner’s bank account.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations about who does the work.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 104 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are about the people who do the work and how they come to do it: a recruiter, a CISO building a team, and a CISO by the fraction.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;46&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/46-polina-morozov-security-recruiter-at-grammarly-on-navigating-and/"&gt;Polina Morozov, security recruiter at Grammarly&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;June 2024 · From Robinhood to Grammarly, and what connects senior talent with the work.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;2&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/2-andrew-gontarczyk-ciso-of-pure-storage-building-a-security-team/"&gt;Andrew Gontarczyk, CISO of Pure Storage&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;May 2021 · When a company should build a security team and what kinds there are, the hire or contract question at a larger scale.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;7&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/7-michael-brooks-vciso-and-director-of-cyber-risk-services-at/"&gt;Michael Brooks, vCISO at Trava&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2021 · The virtual CISO, the senior contractor model that security consultancies sell.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/it-consulting"&gt;IT&lt;/a&gt; boutiques, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/staff-augmentation"&gt;staff augmentation&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/healthcare-staffing"&gt;healthcare staffing&lt;/a&gt; firms, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/engineering-firms"&gt;engineering firms&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If your second person is a contractor, sign up and pay them from the same hours you bill. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Do I need to send a 1099 if I paid a contractor less than $2,000 in 2026?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Not a federal Form 1099-NEC. For payments made in 2026 the Internal Revenue Service threshold is $2,000, up from $600, and it will be adjusted for inflation from 2027. Keep collecting a W-9 before the first payment and keep a running total for each payee, because the threshold is per year and the income is taxable either way. States can have their own rules, so check with your accountant. Forms for 2026 payments are due by Monday, 1 February 2027, because 31 January is a Sunday. This is not tax advice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Do I need to send a 1099 to an LLC?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;It depends on how the LLC is taxed. Payments to a corporation, including an LLC taxed as a C or S corporation, generally need no Form 1099-NEC, with exceptions such as payments to attorneys. An LLC taxed as a sole proprietorship or a partnership generally does. The W-9 you collect before the first payment tells you which, which is one more reason to collect it then. Ask your accountant about your own case.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Can a consulting firm pay consultants as 1099 contractors in New Jersey?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Only if it can prove all three prongs of the ABC test, and from 1 October 2026 the Department of Labor’s rules say so in writing. Prong B is the hard one for a consultancy, because consulting is the firm’s usual course of business, so the firm has to show the work is done outside all of its places of business. A professional license, a registered business, a 1099 or insurance is not enough on its own. Ask an employment attorney before you rely on it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What percentage of the bill rate should a subcontractor get?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is no rule, only conventions. Boutiques and agencies typically keep 30% to 50% of a subcontractor’s billings, 35% on average by one coach’s count, and consulting networks keep 20% to 30% or more. Keeping 35% means paying the contractor 65%, a 54% markup. The right split pays for what the firm adds, the client, the sale, the accountability and the time between paying the contractor and being paid, and leaves a margin you can see per client.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Can I pay my contractor only after my client pays me?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Be careful. New York State, New York City, Illinois, California and Los Angeles give freelancers the payment date in the contract, or thirty days after the work if none is set, with double damages in several of them, and New York forbids making timely payment conditional on accepting less. In construction several states void pay-if-paid clauses, and how far that reaches consulting is unsettled. Ask your attorney, and shorten the gap instead: invoice the client from the same approved hours the contractor is paid from, on the same day.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Does Ceed pay our contractors?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;No. Ceed computes each contractor’s payout statement from the same approved hours as the client’s invoice, at the contractor’s own rate, and your bank or payroll provider moves the money. The owners see the bill rate, the pay rate and the margin per client every morning, the contractor sees their own hours and pay, and the client sees what the agreement puts on the invoice. Ceed costs 0.1% of what you invoice, with no seats, so adding a contractor costs nothing.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>
  <entry>
    <title>Fewer hours. Same margin.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-ai-discount"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/the-ai-discount</id>
    <published>2026-09-29T13:00:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-29T13:00:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Sasha Sinkevich</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>When a client asks for a share of what AI saved, the answer is a decision made with the firm’s own numbers. Who is asking and how often, what the saving is and is not, who owns a saved hour, the new tool bill, and one client’s month worked four ways, with the arithmetic.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;The email is polite. It tends to arrive in the autumn, when next year’s budgets are set, and it usually comes from someone who has just read the article you read. The work is faster now, it says, because of AI, and some of that saving should come back to us. It rarely names a number. It does not have to, because the owner who reads it already knows her own number, roughly, and is doing the arithmetic before she has finished the second paragraph.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;On 31 August 2026 the Financial Times reported that consultants were heading for a showdown with their own clients. Greg Meyers, the chief digital and technology officer of Bristol Myers Squibb, told the paper that “in our cyber security area, we used to pay a lot of third parties to monitor things on our behalf. Now AI is doing a lot of that monitoring and those contracts are going away.” He did not object to the firms making money from the tools. “I’m totally fine for this to be margin-expanding for them as long as we get to participate in the downside.” For a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/mssps"&gt;managed security provider&lt;/a&gt; that first sentence is the whole email. In the same piece UniCredit reported a 24 per cent drop in its spending on external consultants and Société Générale a 9 per cent decline, and Mark Barrocas of SharkNinja said, “We are definitely spending less with consultants.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The biggest firms are on the receiving end too. In February the same paper reported that KPMG had pressed its own auditor, Grant Thornton UK, to cut the fee by about 14%, from $416,000 to $357,000, on the grounds that AI was making the audit cheaper to do. Grant Thornton’s reply is the most useful sentence in the first half of this post: “our fees reflect both the cost of our people and the cost of the technology that supports them.” In August, Reuters reported that the clients of Persistent Systems, one of India’s large service firms, were demanding the same work for 25% to 30% less while expecting faster delivery, according to its chief executive.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;It is not only consulting. At the start of September the Financial Times reported that Wall Street banks were pressing their &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/law-firms"&gt;law firms&lt;/a&gt; to pass the savings on. Adam Meshel, Citigroup’s global head of legal, as Point Blank and eDiscovery Today quoted him: “If the number of hours they’re working on a matter has come down because of AI… our expectation is for costs to come down significantly per transaction.” Modern Counsel’s account of the same reporting had Citigroup asking the firms competing for its work to explain how much money they are saving through AI, Morgan Stanley planning more competitive bidding and more fixed fees, and Goldman Sachs examining how the savings should be reflected in legal bills. On 26 September the New York Times DealBook newsletter put the question in a headline, “As A.I. makes law firms more efficient, clients ask: ‘Where’s my discount?’”, and by the evening of 28 September the Hacker News thread about it had passed 140 points and 150 comments.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;We are on both sides of this email. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/about"&gt;YSecurity&lt;/a&gt;, the security consultancy Ceed was built to run, uses AI in its work and bills in fifteen-minute increments against a monthly cap, so this is a question our own clients can put to us, and one we answer with our own numbers. That is the argument of this post. The request is fair more often than owners like and smaller than clients think, and the answer is a decision made with four numbers the firm should already have: the hours the work took before and after, what the tools now cost, what happened to the quality, and what the client’s money buys now. The answer can be a share of the saving, the same fee with more work in it, a smaller scope, or, sometimes, a raise. It should not be a reflex in either direction. Near the end the same client’s month is worked through four ways, and the last section shows where those four numbers live in Ceed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="who-is-asking"&gt;Who is asking. And how often.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Start with the size of the wave, because it is smaller than the headlines and larger than zero. The Agency Management Institute asked 579 &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agency&lt;/a&gt; leaders and 400 of their clients for its Agency Core study, published on 11 August 2026, and the clients’ answer fits on one line: “29% want a discount when AI gets involved. The rest want better thinking.” The study’s reading of the rest was sharper than any vendor’s: “Clients aren’t replacing agencies with AI. They’re replacing the agencies that act like AI could.” And 42% of the clients planned to reduce an agency relationship within twelve months.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Productive, which sells software to agencies, surveyed more than 180 of them in November 2025: “Around a third of agencies in our survey have already faced this question, while nearly half expect to hear it soon.” Then it asked again. Its pulse survey of 174 agencies and consultancies, fielded in the second half of March and published on 11 June 2026, found what the headlines had not: “Clients haven’t increased the rate of asking for discounts. If anything, the ‘not yet but we expect it’ group grew slightly, suggesting the feared wave of discount requests still hasn’t arrived.” It also found “no consensus on what’s the best pricing model in the age of AI.” Promethean Research, which benchmarks agency finances, saw the pressure in the margins before it saw it in the email: “Some of the recent margin compression appears to be due to pricing pressure from clients expecting cheaper services due to AI advancements.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The large buyers are further along, and they have a finance function in the room. Thomson Reuters’ Future of Professionals report for 2026, a survey of 1,816 professionals across law, tax, audit, accounting, compliance, risk and trade in March and April, found that “78% of corporate clients now consider AI-enabled quality improvements very important or essential, yet just 6% say most of their providers deliver it.” Within twelve months, 32% will be reconsidering provider relationships, and the report put about $143 billion of US legal and accounting revenue “under active reconsideration based on AI delivery.” Axiom’s survey of 510 in-house legal leaders and finance chiefs, published on 8 September, found the other half of the story: “Fifty-nine percent of legal leaders say their law firms raised fees while positioning AI as a value-add, roughly double last year’s share.” And in G2’s survey of 1,038 business software buyers, the preference for outcome-based pricing “more than doubled from 11% to 23% in a single year” while the finance function’s part in a purchase grew from 31% to 46%. Buyers, G2 wrote, “are rejecting pricing they cannot predict, defend, or connect to business value”.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/who-is-asking-for-the-ai-discount-agencies-clients-corporate-buyers-2025-2026.svg" width="640" height="494" alt="Six tiles. 29 percent of agency clients want a discount when AI gets involved, the rest want better thinking, Agency Management Institute, 400 clients, August 2026. About one agency in three had already been asked and nearly half expected to be, Productive, November 2025. No rise in how often clients asked by March 2026, Productive’s pulse of 174 firms. 78 percent of corporate clients call AI-enabled quality essential and 6 percent say most of their providers deliver it, Thomson Reuters, June 2026. 32 percent of corporate clients will be reconsidering provider relationships within twelve months. 59 percent of in-house legal leaders say their firms raised fees while calling AI a value-add, Axiom, September 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Who is asking. Agency Management Institute, Agency Core 2026, 11 August 2026. Productive, 21 November 2025 and 11 June 2026. Thomson Reuters, Future of Professionals 2026, 22 June 2026. Axiom, 2027 In-House Legal Budget Report, 8 September 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;So the email arrives first from clients with a procurement team and a copy of the Financial Times, and later, and more softly, at the small end. A boutique of eight with three enterprise accounts should expect it this quarter. A &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO practice&lt;/a&gt; whose clients are founders may not see it until a founder reads the same article, and a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security consultancy&lt;/a&gt; selling monitoring to a pharmaceutical company has, in effect, already had it, in the Financial Times, from Bristol Myers Squibb.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“AI has created a strange problem for Professional Services firms: the better the technology gets, the fewer hours they have to sell.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;“Watch leverage ratios and associate intake before you watch hourly rates.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;cite&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.linkedin.com/feed/update/urn:li:activity:7496115838916263936/"&gt;James O’Dowd of Patrick Morgan, a recruiter for professional services firms, on LinkedIn&lt;/a&gt;, 20 August 2026, 86 reactions and 27 comments.&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QXAXNcRs7gQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Is McKinsey losing its crown to AI? The Economist, 7 min, published 11 August 2025, 405,800 views. The version of the story most clients have seen, in seven minutes. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QXAXNcRs7gQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;The fundamental unit of value these companies sell, the billable human hour, is being automated away in real time.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@anishmoonka, Anish Moonka&lt;/b&gt; · 4 February 2026 · 603 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/anishmoonka/status/2018956887010824574"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rob Sinfield wrote the complaint every buyer’s email is really making, on LinkedIn on 19 August: “Eighteen months of announcements about work getting faster, and not one published figure on what happens to the fee when it does.” The rest of this post is about producing that figure for one firm.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-trap"&gt;Faster work. Smaller invoice.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Before any client asks, hourly billing has already answered. Clio, which sells practice software to law firms, put it in one sentence this year: “If AI helps you finish a five-hour task in an hour, and you bill by the hour, you’ve just given your client an 80% discount.” Its worked example is an estate planning matter that took 30 hours at $250 and billed $7,500. “If AI saves 40% of the time on that kind of work, the same matter takes 18 hours and bills at $4,500.” Nobody sent an email. Nobody agreed to $3,000 off. It happened in the timesheet. And most firms have not changed anything: in Clio’s 2026 report on solo and small firms, “86% of solo firms and 78% of small firms haven’t changed their pricing at all since they started using AI,” where 51% of mid-market and 46% of enterprise firms had adjusted theirs, and fewer than a third of the solo and small firms had grown revenue with the tools.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/the-efficiency-trap-hourly-billing-an-estate-matter-and-a-forty-hour-audit-clio-2026.svg" width="640" height="328" alt="Two panels. Left, Clio’s estate planning matter: 30 hours at 250 dollars bills 7,500 dollars, and with 40 percent less time, 18 hours bills 4,500, a 3,000 dollar discount nobody decided. Right, Jeff Sauer’s client audit: 40 hours before, 4 hours with AI, 90 percent of that work’s revenue gone under hourly billing. Underneath, 86 percent of solo law firms and 78 percent of small ones have not changed their pricing since they started using AI."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The trap, in two jobs. Clio, on the profitability of small and solo law firms, 2026, and its 2026 report on solo and small firms, 4 May 2026. Jeff Sauer, YouTube, 7 May 2026, from the video’s description.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The consultant Jeff Sauer made an eleven-minute video about the same arithmetic in May, and its title is the whole argument. In the description he gives the numbers: “A client audit used to take me 40 hours. With AI it takes 4. Under hourly billing, that means I cut my own revenue by 90% for doing better work.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cZlA2_iXVY8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;AI Consulting Made Me Faster. Hourly Billing Punished Me For It. Jeff Sauer, Service Stacking, 11 min, published 7 May 2026, 14,000 views. A forty-hour audit that became four, and what it did to his invoice. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cZlA2_iXVY8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“Last year, one of my consultants delivered in two days what used to take three people two weeks.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;“We built a model where getting faster makes you poorer.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;cite&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.linkedin.com/feed/update/urn:li:activity:7496099393931161600/"&gt;Mathilde Henry, a former professional services delivery lead at Adobe, on LinkedIn&lt;/a&gt;, 20 August 2026.&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Michael Zipursky of Consulting Success wrote the rule for anyone who sells hours in July: “The more efficient you become, the faster you solve problems, and the less you earn.” Ikum Kandola, who led generative AI work at PwC before founding a company that sells to consultancies, gave the size of the only fix inside the model: “If delivery time is halved, the value and margin of an engagement fall with it unless firms can realistically double their rates.” Few firms can double a rate in a year. We wrote in September that &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved#eating-hours"&gt;eating hours is a price cut made by the wrong person&lt;/a&gt;. An hour a tool saved and billed by the hour is a price cut made by nobody.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;In billable hours, AI productivity means more output per hour, more revenue per consultant. In outcomes-based pricing, AI productivity means same outcome delivered faster, less revenue per project.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@aakashgupta, Aakash Gupta&lt;/b&gt; · 25 May 2026 · 221 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/aakashgupta/status/2058806284468814292"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Aakash Gupta’s post has a second line that matters more for small firms: “Now every efficiency gain flows to the client instead of the firm.” It is true of every hourly contract the day it is signed. It is also why the trap has a twin. Small US law firms billed 3% to 7% more hours per case as they adopted AI, according to 8am’s MyCase data as reported in July. The tools had not made the matters shorter. Either the work grew into the hours, or the hours stopped measuring the work, and a client who reads that statistic beside Clio’s will ask which.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is a floor under the trap, and it is ethical, not commercial. When OpenAI announced Astra for Law on 17 September, with Sullivan &amp;amp; Cromwell, Ropes &amp;amp; Gray, Cooley and other firms named, the Hacker News thread passed 570 points and 670 comments, and the top joke wrote itself. WarmWash: “Cool, now you can pay an attorney $500/hr for them to prompt Astra for 30 minutes, and bill you like they spent the normal 8 hours on the case.” The reply from stockresearcher was the rule: “That is an ethics violation. Even in the pre-AI era, getting caught billing for hours not worked was seriously punished.” The American Bar Association’s Formal Opinion 512, as the Bar Examiner quoted it, says that “when lawyers are billing hourly, they must only bill for their actual time.” Outside the law the rule is the contract, and the contract says the same thing. An hour that was not worked cannot be billed as one. So under an hourly agreement the saving belongs to the client from the first minute, and the only open questions are whether the firm should still be selling that work by the hour, and what the saving really was.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-frontier"&gt;Faster inside. Worse outside.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The client’s email assumes the saving is real and even. The best evidence says it is real, uneven, and in places imaginary. In 2023 Fabrizio Dell’Acqua and eight coauthors, Ethan Mollick and Karim Lakhani among them, ran an experiment with consultants at Boston Consulting Group and published it as a Harvard Business School working paper. On tasks inside what they called the jagged technological frontier, the consultants with the tool “completed 12.2% more tasks on average, and completed task 25.1% more quickly”, with “more than 40% higher quality”. On a task chosen to sit outside it, they “were 19 percentage points less likely to produce correct solutions” than the consultants without it. Faster and better where the tool is good, confidently wrong where it is not, and the frontier is not marked on the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/the-jagged-frontier-faster-inside-worse-outside-and-the-rate-that-keeps-revenue-flat-hbs-bcg-2023.svg" width="640" height="430" alt="Two panels from the Harvard Business School and Boston Consulting Group experiment of 2023. Inside the frontier, consultants with AI completed 12.2 percent more tasks, finished 25.1 percent faster and produced work of more than 40 percent higher quality. Outside it, they were 19 percentage points less likely to produce a correct solution. Underneath: billed by the hour, a task 25.1 percent faster bills 25.1 percent less, and to keep that revenue the rate has to rise 33.5 percent."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The saving is jagged. Dell’Acqua and coauthors, “Navigating the Jagged Technological Frontier”, Harvard Business School working paper 24-013, September 2023. The 33.5% is our arithmetic.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Mollick’s talk on the study at the Stanford Digital Economy Lab went up a month after the paper, and the hour is worth it for anyone about to promise a client a number. The same shape runs through the studies since. Erik Brynjolfsson, Danielle Li and Lindsey Raymond, studying 5,172 customer support agents, found a 15% gain on average, 36% for the least skilled, and no gain for the most skilled. METR’s trial with sixteen experienced open-source developers across 246 tasks in 2025 found they took 19% longer with the tools than without them. A study of entrepreneurs in Kenya found no average effect and the weakest performers nearly 10% worse. The gains are largest on repeatable work done by people still learning it, which is the work a firm used to give its juniors.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dPJ6Bxsky0s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Ethan Mollick, “Navigating the Jagged Technological Frontier”. Stanford Digital Economy Lab, 61 min, published 24 October 2023, 4,200 views. A coauthor of the consulting experiment on where the tool helps and where it misleads. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dPJ6Bxsky0s"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The savings the firms report are real where the work repeats. Current, the accounting group formerly called Crete Professionals Alliance, said in June that its tax tools processed 7,000 returns in 2025 with about 31% less preparation time. Bob Sternfels said McKinsey had saved “1.5 million hours in search and synthesis work last year”. They are also smaller than the vendors’ claims. When SAP suggested AI could cut the cost of consultants by up to half, Capgemini’s chief executive, Aiman Ezzat, told the Financial Times: “We don’t see 50 per cent.” And Jonathan Stark, who has argued against hourly billing for a decade, wrote on 5 September that after hours with a model on a talk outline he went back to pen and paper: “I’m starting to think the ability to slow down might be a new superpower.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two writers put the result in words a firm can use with a client. Mark Wilson, in July: “AI compresses effort. It doesn’t compress experience.” And “The customer wasn’t buying ten days. They were buying clarity.” Luis Garicano, the economist, pointed out why consultants may end up busier rather than idle, because cheaper analysis means more proposals to argue over: “less analytical effort per decision, but more contested proposals to be considered and authorized, and so more work for consultants and managers.” For the email the lesson is narrower. A saving measured on one kind of task, by one person, in one month, is not a saving on the engagement. The owner who answers from a feeling will guess high or low. The owner who answers from the hours knows which of this client’s work sits inside the frontier and which does not.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-giants"&gt;What the giants did. Out loud.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/global-consulting"&gt;largest firms&lt;/a&gt; have been answering this email in public for a year, and their answers are worth reading for what they concede. McKinsey has moved furthest from the hour, by its own account. Michael Birshan told Business Insider in November 2025 that about a quarter of its global fees were outcome-based: “We’re doing more performance-based arrangements with our clients.” Bob Sternfels told Harvard Business Review in January: “We’re moving away from an advisory model. Today about a third of our revenue comes from underwriting outcomes.” In June the Wall Street Journal put it at more than 30%, citing a senior partner, Shelley Stewart III. The three figures are the firm’s own and unaudited, and they describe a firm large enough to underwrite a client’s result.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hSpem_oGAf0"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How McKinsey Plans to Survive AI (and Reinvent Consulting). Harvard Business Review, 32 min, published 9 February 2026, 190,300 views. Bob Sternfels on fees tied to outcomes. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hSpem_oGAf0"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;PwC’s chief AI officer in the United States, Dan Priest, told Bloomberg in June 2025 what happened when the firm talked about its tools: “Clients would hear us talking about using AI and say, ‘We want our fair share of those efficiencies.’” Bloomberg reported that PwC had cut prices. In March 2026 The Logic reported the US firm’s plan to offer AI tax and consulting tools by subscription, without going through a consultant billing by the hour. In the same month Bloomberg Tax asked the accounting firms how they would price the saving, and Sergio de la Fe of RSM US asked the question of this post in a partner’s own words: “Is that all margin for me or is that all price reduction for our client?” PwC’s US tax leader, Krishnan Chandrasekhar, said “Time’s becoming less and less of relevance,” and put the test as a question to the client: “Would this fee be a fair price for us executing this transaction for you?”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Accenture’s chief financial officer, Angie Park, defined the word on the March earnings call: “pricing, which is the margin on the work that we sell.” Julie Sweet said revenue and the number of people had not moved in step for a decade: “we really have not had a linear relationship since around 2015 when RPA, when automation really came in.” Accenture reports its full year on Thursday, 1 October, two days after this post. Cognizant’s chief financial officer, Jatin Dalal, told a Citi conference on 8 September that “There is no specific pressure on rate card”, that the pressure is on the total cost of ownership, and that the firm now prices effort and machine work as two quantities: “you have Q1 and Q2, where Q1 is the effort, which was classic human effort, and you have Q2, which is the inference, and you are pricing both.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VtywLsAPiOE"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;KPMG squeezes auditor for AI discounts, Accountech Bytes episode 146. AccountingWEB, 10 min, published 12 February 2026, 102 views. The Grant Thornton fee story from the accounting trade press. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=VtywLsAPiOE"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;India’s &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/it-consulting"&gt;IT service firms&lt;/a&gt; are where the contracts have moved most, and Reuters’ August report is the best map of the terms. At Tata Consultancy Services, “About 80% of the company’s contracts within its finance, human resources and other business services segment are now based on outcome performance measures,” double the share of late 2023. HCLTech’s contract with E.ON paid nothing in the first year, with later payments tied to efficiency and outcomes. Cognizant’s contract with Daimler Truck “stipulated AI-related cost savings would be split between the vendor and the client”. Infosys told analysts it had walked away from contracts that were no longer economically viable. Jimit Arora of Everest Group: “It’s a desperate market for the service providers. The odds are very much in favour of clients.” Mohit Joshi of Tech Mahindra said that “our competition at times is doing irrational things”, and Reuters reported rivals pricing in productivity gains of 70% to 80% over five to seven years and guaranteeing the prices.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Deloitte reported $74.5 billion of revenue for its fiscal 2026 on 24 September, up 3.8%, with its technology and transformation business up 2.5%. Earlier, according to the Wall Street Journal as The Decoder reported it, the leader of its US public sector consulting practice told a town hall that the traditional billed work, “even though still a significant part in 2035, will only be a part of the overall picture”. One consultant’s summary of the meeting, in the same report: “They heavily implied our model is toast.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Outcome fees move the problem rather than solve it. A Hacker News commenter, alberth, described a McKinsey pitch to his company in which the firm would earn 10% of any incremental revenue, and the difficulty it made on the client’s side: “finance teams struggle to plan or allocate budgets because the final amount could range widely”, from $200,000 to $20 million depending on the results. Anshuman Vedi, the founder of Techspire Consulting, wrote in August that outcome pricing needs a person who owns the result on the client’s side: “Without that person, outcome-based pricing is simply a new fee model attached to the same old delivery problem.” And a three-minute video from Willingness to Pay makes the pricing consultant’s version of the same objection.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wwdg2HAkO00"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Outcome-Based Pricing: Why It Sounds Better Than It Is. Willingness to Pay, 3 min, published 7 April 2026, 342 views. The case against the fashionable answer, briefly. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wwdg2HAkO00"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Where the readers of this blog live, among &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;fractional executives&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;boutique consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/advisors"&gt;professional advisors&lt;/a&gt;, the hour is still the unit. Go Fractional’s June 2026 study of its job board found that “hourly pricing remains the dominant model” and that outcome-based deals, “while growing in conversation, are still ramping up in practice”, at an average of $153 an hour. One of its respondents asked the question this post is about, how to reprice “when AI is increasing your efficiency and decreasing hours”. The Consulting Success fees study of nearly 1,000 consultants in more than 75 countries, published in May and updated on 7 September, found project fees the most common primary model at 30%, hourly at 29%, monthly retainers at 16%, value-based fees at 15% and daily rates at 10%. And the largest buyer in the world made the fixed price its default this year. An executive order of 30 April 2026 requires that “Any non-fixed-price contract must be justified in writing by the contracting officer to the agency head,” and the proposed rewrite of the federal acquisition rules for contract types, published on 18 September, takes comments until 19 October. For a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/defense-contractors"&gt;defense contractor&lt;/a&gt; the discount question arrives as a contract type, and the saving is the firm’s only if it knows its own cost.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/how-consultants-price-project-hourly-retainer-value-daily-consulting-success-2026.svg" width="640" height="400" alt="Horizontal bars showing how nearly a thousand consultants price: project-based 30 percent, hourly 29 percent, monthly retainer 16 percent, value-based 15 percent, daily rate 10 percent. Below, 79 percent are actively looking to raise their fees and 39 percent have never tried value pricing because they do not know how. Consulting Success, 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How consultants price, 2026. Consulting Success, Consulting Fees Study, nearly 1,000 consultants in more than 75 countries. First drawn for &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;The rate was set on day one&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="whose-hour"&gt;Whose hour is it. Read the contract.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Under the email sits a question the client does not ask out loud: who owns an hour that a tool saved. It has three answers, and the contract already chose one of them before anyone opened a model.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Under time and materials, the saved hour is the client’s. The firm sold hours, the hours fell, and the invoice falls with them. The bar’s rule for lawyers is the plain version of every hourly contract: “A fee charged for which little or no work was performed is an unreasonable fee,” in the Bar Examiner’s quotation of Opinion 512. Greg Meyers’s “participate in the downside” is a fair demand here, and the firm that resists it is arguing with its own agreement. The honest move on an hourly contract is not to refuse the saving but to ask whether the work should still be sold by the hour, which is the next two answers.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Under a fixed fee or a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;retainer&lt;/a&gt;, the saved hour is the firm’s, because the firm carried the risk that the work would run long. The client bought a result at a price and got it. Here the email is really about resentment, and Blair Enns, who with David C. Baker has argued against labor-based pricing for years on the 2Bobs podcast, explained in May why it arrives in the middle of a contract rather than at the start of one: “Resentment only arises in your existing client relationships. You don’t lose deals because of pricing resentment.” The lesson he drew: “I should have structured the deal so that my pay was highest when my value was.” Baker added the part that explains a retainer in its second year: “Your highest value was at the beginning, and you’re continuing to get paid the same way even though the value you’re creating is dropping.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eyxcXo_By5U"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Is AI Going to Kill Labor-based Pricing? 2Bobs with David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 28 min, published 25 March 2026, 155 views. The episode behind Enns’s ninety percent. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eyxcXo_By5U"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;In that episode Enns went further than anyone quoted in this post. AI, he said, was “the last great forcing function that will ultimately kill labor-based pricing in 90% of the businesses out there, including almost all professional services firms.” He also said, “I don’t think you go to hell for selling time,” and his reading of the buyers is worth a small firm’s attention: “If you look at what the leaders in marketing procurement are writing, they’re all saying, ‘Listen, agencies, we’re ready to go past hourly rates.’” Baker’s version was shorter: “Labor-based pricing is dead.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Under an outcome or a value price, the saving was never on the table, because the price was set on what the result is worth. Ron Baker, who has argued it for decades at VeraSage, told Jetpack Workflow in September that “The billable hour’s been dead for decades. We just haven’t had the funeral yet. AI is delivering the funeral,” and that “Value is not a number. Value’s a feeling.” Asked whether a firm still needs timesheets once it stops billing hourly, he answered in one word: “No.” Jonathan Stark wrote in August that a firm which moves to fixed prices and still builds them from hours has changed its model and not its mind: “You’re forcing the client to evaluate you as labor because you’re only giving them labor to evaluate,” and “Until you know the answers to questions like these, you’re just sneaking hours into the proposal.” Brad Blickstein, who runs the Blickstein Group, put it to The Geek in Review in August: “The amount of time it takes to do the work is not the same as the value of the work,” and, of clients who ask for the hours under a fixed fee, “Either you feel you’re getting fair value or you don’t. But the hours aren’t your business.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MIw2p6Upy68"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How AI Will Kill the Billable Hour in CPA Firms. Ron Baker with Jetpack Workflow, 34 min, published 6 September 2026, 1,536 views. The strongest version of the case against timesheets, three weeks old. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MIw2p6Upy68"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;You can’t partner with clients while you bill them hourly. Hourly billing is an adversarial structure. You profit when things take longer. They profit when things go faster. That’s not a partnership. That’s a conflict of interest.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@jonathanstark, Jonathan Stark&lt;/b&gt; · 2 April 2026 · 20 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/jonathanstark/status/2039810856767181028"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The Hacker News thread on the DealBook piece argued the same three answers with better jokes. otterley retold the old story of the plumber’s bill, with its two lines, “Pipe tapping: $5” and “Knowing where to tap: $495”. neya: “AI is just a tool like everything else. Are you also going to ask me for a discount because I used a powered screw driver?” springtimesun wrote that “you often aren’t really paying for the hours, you’re paying the structural tax that has been established by the system,” and thayne pointed out the asymmetry nobody in the industry mentions: “if AI is making software developers so much more productive, those developers are not getting paid substantially more, or having to work fewer hours.” That last one is the fourth owner of the saved hour, the person who did the work. Inside a firm the saving often goes to the worker first, as a shorter day or a free afternoon, and nobody tells the client or the owner.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Every company is full of secret cyborgs. When I give talks, people always come up afterwards to confess they have automated their work and don’t want to tell anyone.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@emollick, Ethan Mollick&lt;/b&gt; · 2 August 2024 · 380 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/emollick/status/1819240740985115127"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Whatever the contract says, the market will take some of the saving in the end. Three McKinsey authors wrote in April that “competition tends to erode productivity gains, benefiting customers more than the companies that implement them,” and that the firms which capture the gains ahead of rivals “can temporarily expand margins”. Benjamin Verschuere and Angus Cameron of Liminal Capital wrote in ProMarket in July that “as rival firms adopt the same tools and engage in competition, the productivity gains convert from profits to lower prices, and the surplus passes to consumers.” The word that matters in both is time. The firm that answers the email this quarter from its numbers keeps the gain longer than the firm that answers in two years because a competitor quoted less.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=adgZ2x2_ez8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Brad Blickstein on Private Equity Thinking, AI Pricing, and the Law Firm Business Model. The Geek In Review, 41 min, published 3 August 2026, 136 views. “Better productivity should decrease revenue”, and what a firm does about it. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=adgZ2x2_ez8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here is where we land, and it is not quite where the value pricing school lands. On a fixed fee the hours are not the client’s business. They are the owner’s. Accenture’s chief financial officer defined pricing as the margin on the work, and margin is a number nobody can know without the cost of the work, which for a firm that sells its team’s time is mostly hours. Toggl, which sells time tracking and argues for leaving hourly billing, says it in so many words: “If you run retainers, track your time on them anyway. Not to bill it, but to see what your retainer actually costs to deliver each month.” And the large buyers will read the inputs whatever the seller prefers.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;enterprise buyers aren’t idiots. they break down input costs and then negotiate. selling them on value is orthogonal to selling billable hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@ponnappa, Sidu Ponnappa&lt;/b&gt; · 12 June 2026 · 46 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/ponnappa/status/2065332462746542119"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;So keep the hours as private evidence and talk about the outcome in public. We wrote in July, in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed#stop-counting-hours"&gt;why we built Ceed&lt;/a&gt;, that whatever a firm charges, the hours are still its cost, and later that month that &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee#the-number-only-you-know"&gt;the number only you know&lt;/a&gt; is the budget in hours behind a flat fee. The discount email is where that number earns its keep. A firm that stopped keeping timesheets has nothing to answer a procurement team with except a feeling, and a firm that bills every hour it keeps has already given the saving away.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-cost-line"&gt;A new line. On the cost side.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The email counts the saving and forgets the bill. The Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta asked firms in March what they spend on AI and published the answers on 6 May: $1,358 per employee in 2025 and $2,068 expected in 2026 across firms, and in professional and business services “$3,470 per employee in 2026, a 74 percent increase from 2025”. The spread is wide. The median firm expected to spend no more than $200 a person, and the top tenth at least $2,800. For a firm of ten at the sector’s figure, that is about $34,700 a year, or $289 a person a month. Small beside the people. Not zero, rising fast, and priced by someone else’s list.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/a-new-line-on-the-cost-side-ai-spending-per-employee-atlanta-fed-2026.svg" width="640" height="330" alt="Three bars of AI spending per employee from the Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta, May 2026: 1,358 dollars across firms in 2025, 2,068 dollars expected in 2026, and 3,470 dollars in professional and business services in 2026, up 74 percent. The median firm spends 200 dollars or less per employee and the top tenth 2,800 dollars or more. At 3,470 dollars a year, about 289 dollars a person a month."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What the tools cost. Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta, “How Much Are Firms Spending on AI (and What Will Happen to Headcounts)?”, 6 May 2026, questions asked in March 2026. The monthly figure is our arithmetic.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Grant Thornton made the point to KPMG in February, and an unnamed former KPMG partner made it more bluntly to The Finance Story: “We’ve invested millions in AI over the last five years. Are you factoring that into the fee, or just expecting the benefits for free?” On our own show, a week ago, Yash Kosaraju, the chief information security officer of a16z, described the bill that comes with speed: “There is one way of finishing the same task in 10 minutes that might cost you $250. Or it could take you 15 minutes and cost you only $50.” The fastest way to do a task is not always the cheapest, and a firm that bills a client ten quick minutes may have paid $250 for them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The meter is also hard to read. DISCO surveyed 53 law firms and 51 in-house teams and published on 23 September. One respondent: “The token/credit costs seem to be changing as the definition of a task evolves.” DISCO’s own James Park: “Pricing transparency has become a bigger constraint on adoption than output.” Thomson Reuters found in February that “Only 18% of respondents said they knew their organization was tracking return-on-investment (ROI) of AI tools in some manner,” and that 40% of firms had received instructions both to use AI on matters and not to use it, from different clients. Forrester reported in June that 61% of agencies still classify AI as “a ‘cost of business,’ with limited direct monetization.” Paweł Huryn, who writes about product management, closed a post in June with a line about who keeps the saving in the long run: “The savings were never yours. They’re rent, paid up to whoever owns the model.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Whether the firm can pass the tool cost to the client is a question the law has thought about hardest, and its answers are a good default elsewhere. Carolyn Elefant, in a column the Illinois State Bar Association republished in July: “Subscriptions, platform licenses, and tools that equip the practice generally are overhead,” and “A lawyer may charge a client for metered AI usage, but only when the charges are attributable to the client’s specific matter, billed at actual cost without markup.” Her rule for the rest: “A lawyer whose ordinary AI costs rise should raise rates or adopt flat fees rather than itemize tokens.” Oregon’s bar said in 2025 that lawyers must tell clients, preferably in writing, if they intend to charge the actual cost of AI. Clients are writing their own rules into the time entry. Fulkerson Advisors read 1,054 sets of outside counsel guidelines as of 16 September and found that 20 mention AI: 12 require disclosure, two refuse to pay for time spent using or learning the tools, two refuse to pay for subscriptions, and three expect the savings passed on as fewer hours. Zscaler’s guidelines are the clearest: “If a timekeeper uses generative AI for a discrete task, they should note that in their time entry,” and “Any time and cost associated with AI-generated work product shall not be passed on to Zscaler.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Small firms improvise. A planning assistant at a seven-person consultancy told Productive what hers did: “Day rates of employees decreased due to the workflow automation enabled by AI, and the AI subscription was added as expenses claim.” That is one answer. The better one, for most firms, is to treat the tools as a cost of the work, count them next to the people on each client, and let the price absorb them the way it absorbs rent. Either way the number has to exist before the email does.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-split"&gt;Some hours fall. Some rise.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The clients are not wrong that the price of some work is falling. They are wrong that it is falling for all of it. Upwork’s Future Workforce Index, published on 14 July from a survey of 2,400 US skilled workers and its own marketplace data, is the clearest picture of the split. Earnings for “AI-based execution tasks” fell 28% in a year. For generative and creative production, contract starts grew 90% while earnings per contract fell 13%. Meanwhile “AI-augmented professional services grew 72% year over year and saw earnings rise 22%,” and freelancers doing more complex work with AI saw their earnings rise 45% in the first quarter of 2026. Across every category, freelancers doing AI work earned 34% more per hour than those who did not. Nick Bloom, the Stanford economist, gave the reading in Upwork’s release. The value is not arriving evenly, he said, and is “concentrated in more complex work where people are applying expertise, judgment, and business context on top of AI.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/the-hour-is-splitting-freelance-earnings-by-kind-of-work-upwork-2026.svg" width="640" height="330" alt="Four bars of year over year change in freelance earnings, Upwork 2026: AI-based execution tasks down 28 percent, generative and creative production per contract down 13 percent, AI-augmented professional services up 22 percent, complex work with AI up 45 percent in the first quarter of 2026. Freelancers doing AI work earn 34 percent more per hour than those who do not."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The hour is splitting. Upwork, Future Workforce Index 2026, 14 July 2026, 2,400 US skilled workers and marketplace data.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rates for judgment are rising. The Thomson Reuters Institute’s law firm index for the second quarter of 2026 found that “Worked rates climbed 7.1%, a pace that would have been almost unthinkable before the last few years,” with technology spending up 11.6%, and warned that “Sustained increases could trigger a pushback, a move toward alternative fee arrangements, or other competitive pressures.” Axiom’s 2025 survey had found that “Only 6% of law firms are charging less for AI-assisted work” and that 34% were charging more. Among independent consultants, 54% raised their rates in the past two years and the North American median is $290 an hour, according to a survey by Reinvention Academy in August. Among agencies the pressure shows: Promethean Research counted 28% raising rates in 2025 and 20% in 2026, with 29% charging between $175 and $199 an hour. Fractional executives quote $153 an hour on average on Go Fractional’s board and $223 at vice president level and above in Fractional Jobs’ report, which are different populations, not a trend. And Cognizant, for all the pressure on its contracts, said revenue per person rose 5% in the first half of 2026.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“Selling time-and-materials directly penalizes efficiency.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;cite&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.linkedin.com/feed/update/urn:li:activity:7503386638925070336/"&gt;Charley Grant, head of consulting at Andersen, on LinkedIn&lt;/a&gt;, 9 September 2026.&lt;/cite&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Marcel Petitpas and Kristen Kelly of Parakeeto, who run the numbers for agencies, said it best in their episode of 9 September: “AI hasn’t made agency work worse, it has made parts of it replicable,” and “Pricing pressure is usually a mismatch signal: what your firm values isn’t what this client values.” The honest answer to the email splits the work the same way. On the replicable part, the drafts, the first pass, the formatting, the triage, the client is often right and a share is owed. On the judgment, the review, the decision and the name on the result, the price may deserve to rise, and a firm can only say which part is which if it knows where its hours went.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WN4o7Hdxvyg"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What AI is actually doing to your margins and what to do about it, with Marcel Petitpas, episode 232. Parakeeto, 49 min, published 9 September 2026, 93 views. Agency margins this month, from people who read agencies’ books. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WN4o7Hdxvyg"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="four-answers"&gt;One email. Four answers.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Take one client and one month, with the numbers from Ceed’s demo account, which uses invented names. Acme Co is billed $400 an hour, capped at $16,000 a month, and the consultant on it, Tomás, is paid $150 an hour. In the spring the work took 40 hours a month: $16,000 invoiced, $6,000 of people cost, $10,000 of margin, 62.5%. In September, with the tools, the same work takes 30 hours, and the tools cost $300 a month for this client. Then the email arrives. Here are four answers, with what each does to the month.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-ai-discount/one-email-four-answers-the-same-client-month-thirty-hours-instead-of-forty.svg" width="640" height="444" alt="A table for Acme Co, a demo client billed 400 dollars an hour with the consultant paid 150. Spring: 40 hours, invoice 16,000, people 6,000, tools 0, margin 10,000, 62.5 percent. Answer one, say nothing and bill the hours: 30 hours, invoice 12,000, people 4,500, tools 300, margin 7,200, 60 percent. Answer two, the share, a fixed monthly fee: 30 hours, invoice 14,800, margin 10,000, 67.6 percent. Answer three, the hold with more: 40 hours, invoice 16,000, people 6,000, tools 300, margin 9,700, 60.6 percent. Answer four, the re-scope: 22 hours, invoice 12,000, people 3,300, tools 300, margin 8,400, 70 percent."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Four answers to the same email, one client month. Our arithmetic, with the numbers from Ceed’s demo account.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The first answer is to say nothing and bill the hours as they fall. The invoice is $12,000 and the margin $7,200. The client has had 25% off, and nobody decided it. It is where 86% of solo law firms are, by Clio’s count, and it is the only answer that gives the client more than the email asked for.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The second is the share. Move the client from hours to a fixed monthly fee for the same scope and give part of the saving back. At $14,800 a month the client pays 7.5% less and the firm keeps $10,000, exactly what it made in the spring. This is the answer in the title: fewer hours, the same margin in dollars, and a price the client can see went down. It is also where the largest contracts are going, as in Cognizant’s agreement with Daimler Truck to split the savings.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The third is the hold, with more. Keep the fee and put the ten hours back into work the client wanted and never had the budget for: the quarterly test, the second review, the report nobody had time to write. The margin is $9,700, and the client pays the same for ten more hours of work a month than the old scope needed. Gini Dietrich, who runs the agency Spin Sucks, wrote the reply for this one: “AI made the mechanics faster,” and the efficiency shows up as speed, scope and reliability. It is the right answer when the client’s real complaint is value, which by the Agency Management Institute’s count is the other 71%.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The fourth is the re-scope. If the client wants cheaper, change what they buy. Take the monthly report out of the agreement, price the rest at $12,000 fixed, and do it in 22 hours. The client pays 25% less and gets less, the firm keeps $8,400 at 70%, and the change is written down. Dietrich again: “If you want cheaper, we adjust scope or service levels.” We wrote about how a scope changes in writing, in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement#the-change-notice"&gt;the change notice&lt;/a&gt;, in September.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is a fifth answer, the raise, for the client whose work moved the other way. If the tools made the review deeper and the result better, and the work sits in Upwork’s rising categories, the firm can say so and price it. A raise needs the same evidence as a cut. The general counsel in Thomson Reuters’ August survey of stand-out lawyers was asking exactly that: “Are we actually seeing the benefit of that, or are we just seeing increased partner rates to offset efficiencies gained from AI for less associate billing?” We wrote about a &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;rate that never moved&lt;/a&gt; while the client grew, and how a firm raises one.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The words matter as much as the arithmetic. Thomson Reuters’ survey of 2,527 lawyers nominated by their clients boiled the conversation down to three questions: “What changed about the work? What changed for the client? What value did that create?” And it added that “The client does not need a tour of the firm’s AI stack.” What the client needs to know, it went on, is “what work will be done faster, clearer, safer, more predictably, and become more useful because of AI.” Jonathan Stark’s questions for the start of any price are the same ones pointed at value: “What is the buyer trying to make happen?” and “What changes if this is a home run?” A buyer on Hacker News said what he had actually been looking for from a contractor: “the rate was never what i was looking at. it was whether the person could tell me what something would cost before they built it.” Prabhash Nayak, on LinkedIn in August, told buyers what to ask: “Not how many people are on the account. Ask what happens to the fee when that number goes down.” The firm that has the answer before the question is asked is the one that keeps the client.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=991j7GkAhWc"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Pricing Resentment. 2Bobs with David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 20 min, published 20 May 2026, 112 views. Why the email arrives in the middle of a contract, not at the start. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=991j7GkAhWc"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here are the three replies, in the words we would use. They are drafts, not quotes, and the numbers are the firm’s to fill in.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The share: “You’re right that parts of this got faster. The research and first drafts on your account took about 40 hours a month in the spring and about 30 now. Some of that saving should be yours, so from 1 November the monthly fee is $14,800. What stays the same is the review, the judgment and who signs off.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hold: “The hours on drafting fell, and we put them back into the quarterly testing you asked about in June rather than cut the invoice. If you would rather have a lower fee, we can take the monthly report out. Either way you will see the dated work each month.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The re-scope: “The fee was set for an outcome, not for hours. What changed is the risk on our side, not the result on yours. If the scope should change, let’s change the scope, and the fee with it.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NB57eJ4wm5o"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;2030 agency predictions from industry expert Karl Sakas. Sakas &amp;amp; Company, 53 min, published 9 April 2025, 168 views. The player starts at the chapter on what to tell clients who want an AI discount, 34:25 on YouTube. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NB57eJ4wm5o"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="in-ceed"&gt;The hours stay. The price is yours.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Everything above comes down to four numbers for each client: the hours before, the hours now, what the tools cost, and the margin that is left. None of them is on the client’s invoice under a flat fee, and all of them are the owner’s to keep. This is the part of a firm Ceed keeps.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hours stay, whatever the invoice says. In Ceed the team logs its hours against each client’s budget, from one Slack reminder a day, whether the agreement bills them or not. A flat retainer invoices as a flat retainer, one line, and the hours behind it, with the budget the owner sized the fee from, stay with the firm, as the home page says under &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#fee"&gt;the client sees the fee&lt;/a&gt;. That record is the answer to the email: forty hours in April and thirty in September on the same work, dated, in the words of the person who did it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/time-tracking-ledger-forty-one-hours-one-held-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="778" alt="Ceed’s time tracking page for a demo account: Tomás has logged 41.0 hours in September. A ledger of seven entries against Acme Co, dated 1 to 10 September, each with its start and end time, hours and a description of what moved forward, the last one an hour marked Held."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The evidence for the conversation. Time tracking on Ceed’s staging environment for a demo account, September 2026: every entry against Acme Co, dated, with the hours and what the work was. The month before the tools and the month after sit in the same list.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The margin is there before the email. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#follows"&gt;Revenue, cost and margin for every client&lt;/a&gt; are in Ceed every morning, from the hours as they are logged, and visible to the owners and whoever they name. An owner who sees 62.5% on Acme Co today knows what 7.5% off would leave, and what 25% off would, before she writes back, and the month reads invoiced, people cost, operating cost and cash margin side by side. We wrote in September about &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved#margin-per-client"&gt;margin per client, this morning&lt;/a&gt;, and it is this post’s answer too.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/economics-invoiced-people-cost-cash-margin-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="434" alt="Ceed’s Economics page for a demo firm in September 2026. The headline reads: September, invoiced $0, people cost $6,000, cash profit minus $6,000. A note says cash is the only profit and that one client is 100% of the month’s book. Below, the projected month end: invoiced $16,000, people cost $6,000, opex $0, cash margin 62.5%, booked and never extrapolated."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The number to answer with. Ceed’s Economics view on staging for a demo firm with one client, September 2026: invoiced, people cost, operating cost and the cash margin the month is heading for, 62.5% on $16,000, computed from the booked hours and never extrapolated.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The answer becomes a term. The agreement in Ceed is a terms card: the monthly cap, the rate by tier, the discount, the yearly escalator and any equity taken as payment, versioned, with the signed paperwork attached to the version. A share of the saving is a new version with a discount on it, or a new fee, dated, and every invoice after it is computed from the version in force. The escalator is on the same card, for the client whose work moved the other way. Nothing about the price depends on someone remembering what was agreed in an email in October.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/agreement-terms-cash-cap-escalator-tier-rate-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="331" alt="Ceed’s terms card for a demo account: On-demand security team, contract version one since September 2026, with a cash cap of $16,000 a month, discount none, equity none, escalator per year none, and a Tier 1 rate of $400 an hour, plus buttons to edit the terms, attach paperwork and add a new version."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Where the share goes. The terms card on Ceed’s staging environment for a demo account, September 2026: the cap, the discount, equity, the escalator and the rate, with a new version for any change and the paperwork attached to it.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The invoice shows what the money bought. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement#the-invoice"&gt;The invoice comes from the agreement&lt;/a&gt;, with the approved entries beneath the charges, dated, in the order the invoice carries them. When a procurement team asks what changed, the work detail is the answer, and the agreement decides how much of it the client sees. And when a client asks for more for less, the hour that would push past the budget &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#approvals"&gt;waits for a person’s yes&lt;/a&gt;, so the hold with more is a decision made on the day and not a leak found at the invoice, as we wrote in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden#a-held-hour-waits"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/invoice-computed-from-approved-hours-work-detail-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="622" alt="Ceed’s invoice view for a demo account: a Draft, Generated, Submitted, Paid, Settled pipeline, net to invoice $16,000, one line for Tomás Aguilar at Tier 1, and a work detail of six dated entries totalling 40 hours, with the note that every approved entry is evidence under the charges, never a pricing input."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What the money bought. An invoice on Ceed’s staging environment for a demo account, September 2026: the math, then the work detail underneath, six approved entries and forty hours, the evidence under the charges and never a pricing input.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed uses AI, and it shows the bill. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#intelligence"&gt;Ceed Intelligence&lt;/a&gt; reads a firm’s people list, W-2s and 1099s, client list and signed agreements into the record, turns a sentence into the act and answers with the firm’s own numbers. Every act shows its price before the firm confirms it, the model’s cost is its own line on the statement, and every number on an invoice is still computed from the agreement and the record, the same way every time. That is the practice this post argues for, applied to ourselves: the tool’s cost is visible for each act, and the price is set by the agreement, not by the minutes the machine saved.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;And Ceed’s own price takes part in the downside. It is &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/#price"&gt;0.1% of what the firm invoices&lt;/a&gt;, with no seats, no tiers and no minimum, and a month you invoice nothing costs nothing. If a share of the saving takes $1,200 off a client’s month, Ceed’s bill for that month falls by $1.20. Ceed never touches the money. Your bank moves it, and your ledger, your project tool and your payroll provider stay where they are. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;Where Ceed stands beside the time trackers and the suites&lt;/a&gt; is on the comparison page, row by row, dated.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Eight books, four on pricing the work instead of the hours, two on what the tools do to expertise, and two on the economics underneath.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0470584610"&gt;Implementing Value Pricing&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Ronald J. Baker, 2010. The case for pricing the customer rather than the hour, and for dropping the timesheet, which is the view this post argues with most.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1605440523"&gt;Pricing Creativity&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Blair Enns, 2018. Pricing rules for firms that sell ideas, options and anchors included, from one of the two voices of the 2Bobs.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1605440604"&gt;The Business of Expertise&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David C. Baker, 2017. The other 2Bob on selling expertise rather than labor, and on positioning a firm so the discount conversation happens less.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119776929"&gt;Value-Based Fees&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Alan Weiss, third edition, 2021. The consultant’s handbook for fees set on the client’s outcome, with the conversations that get there.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://jonathanstark.com/hbin"&gt;Hourly Billing Is Nuts&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jonathan Stark, 2017. Short essays on the incentive problem in its plainest form, sold as an ebook from his site.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0198841892"&gt;The Future of the Professions&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Richard Susskind and Daniel Susskind, updated edition, 2022. The long view of what professionals sell when technology makes expertise cheap.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/059371671X"&gt;Co-Intelligence&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Ethan Mollick, 2024. By a coauthor of the jagged frontier study, on where the tools help and where they mislead.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1633695670"&gt;Prediction Machines&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Ajay Agrawal, Joshua Gans and Avi Goldfarb, 2018. When prediction gets cheap, judgment becomes the scarce input, which is the economics under the whole email.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations about what speed costs.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 104 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are about the price of going faster, from the buyer’s side of the table.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;104&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/104-why-a16zs-ciso-doesnt-trust-the-approve-button/"&gt;Yash Kosaraju, chief information security officer at a16z&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;September 2026 · Why he does not trust the approve button, and the same task done in ten minutes for $250 or in fifteen for $50.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;79&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/79-ai-at-brinks-home-lower-costs-better-customer-support/"&gt;Veronica Moturi, Brinks Home&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;October 2025 · Lower costs and better support: AI takes the first line and people keep the judgment, a buyer’s view of the saving.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;73&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/73-how-free-ai-tools-become-expensive-mistakes/"&gt;Michael Moore, vice president and head of legal at Glean&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;July 2025 · How free AI tools become expensive mistakes, the cost line seen from the buyer’s legal department.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/it-consulting"&gt;IT&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/data-ai-consultancies"&gt;data and AI consultancies&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;management consultancies&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/law-firms"&gt;law firms&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people, and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries"&gt;nineteen kinds of firm&lt;/a&gt; in all. If a client has asked for a share of what AI saved, sign up and answer from your own hours. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Should a consultancy charge less when it uses AI?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Sometimes, and by a number the firm can work out. On an hourly agreement the client already pays less when the hours fall, because an hour that was not worked cannot be billed. On a fixed fee or a retainer the saving is the firm’s, which carried the risk, and a share is a decision rather than a debt. Make it with four numbers: the hours before and after on the same work, what the tools cost for that client, what happened to the quality, and what the fee now buys. In our worked example a client whose work fell from 40 hours to 30 could have 7.5% off and the firm would keep the same margin in dollars.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;If AI makes the work faster, why does it cost the same?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Because the client pays for the result and the risk, not the minutes, and because the saving is uneven. In the Harvard Business School experiment with Boston Consulting Group consultants, the tool made work 25.1% faster inside its frontier and made people 19 percentage points less likely to be right outside it, so the review and judgment around the tool did not get cheaper. The tools are also a new cost, about $3,470 per employee in professional and business services in 2026 by the Atlanta Fed’s count. When the price stays, say what the saving bought instead: more work, faster turnaround or a deeper review.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Is the time AI saves margin for the firm or a price cut for the client?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The contract decides. Under time and materials it is the client’s from the first minute. Under a fixed fee or a retainer it is the firm’s, and competition takes some of it back over time, as three McKinsey authors wrote in April 2026. Under an outcome price it was never on the table. Most firms have a mix, so the useful answer is per client: which work sits inside the frontier, what share of the hours it was, and what the margin on that client is this morning. RSM’s Sergio de la Fe asked the same question in March, and it has no answer without the hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Can a firm pass its AI tool costs on to clients?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Usually inside the price, not as a line. The law has written the clearest rules: subscriptions that equip the practice are overhead, metered usage for one client’s matter can be billed at actual cost without markup, and clients should be told in advance, as commentators summarize the American Bar Association’s Opinion 512 and Oregon’s 2025 opinion. Some clients now refuse outright. Of 1,054 outside counsel guidelines read by Fulkerson Advisors, two refuse to pay for AI subscriptions, and Zscaler’s refuse any AI cost at all. Count the tools against each client as a cost of the work and set the price with them in it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What should I say when a client asks for an AI discount?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Say what changed, with numbers, and offer a choice. Thomson Reuters’ three questions are a good frame: what changed about the work, what changed for the client, and what value that created. Then offer the share, a lower fixed fee that still keeps your margin, the hold, the same fee with the saved hours put back into work the client wants, or the re-scope, a smaller fee for a named, smaller scope. Keep the review, the judgment and who signs off the same, and put whatever you agree in the agreement, dated.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;If we price on value, do we still need to track hours?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Yes, for yourself. Value pricing takes the hours off the invoice, not out of the business. The hours are the cost of the work, and without them a firm cannot know its margin per client or answer a procurement team that asks what changed. Toggl, which sells time tracking, gives the same advice for retainers: track the time anyway, to see what each one costs to deliver. In Ceed a flat retainer invoices as one line, and the hours behind it, with the budget the fee was sized from and the margin it leaves, stay with the firm.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>
  <entry>
    <title>Ten rows. One engagement.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement</id>
    <published>2026-09-12T09:30:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-12T09:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>The comparison page has ten rows, five columns and a date. This is the long version: what a firm of two to fifty people loses at each row, what Ignition, Anchor, the time trackers and the suites do about it in their own documentation, and what Ceed does. With twelve recordings, five figures and the five changes the reading made to the page.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;The &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;comparison page&lt;/a&gt; is a table. One row for each step of an engagement, in the order the engagement happens, and a column each for Ceed, Ignition, Anchor, the time trackers and the professional services suites. Every cell reads Built, Yes, No or Partial, and the page carries the date it was last checked. A table can say what a product does. It cannot say what it costs a firm of eight when the product does not do it, or what the field’s Yes looks like at three in the morning. This post takes the rows one at a time.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Three things per row. The pain, in the numbers and in the words of the people who run these firms. What the field does about it, taken from the vendors’ own help centers and pricing pages as they read on 12 September 2026, because a help center is where a product tells the truth about itself and a home page is where it tells the story. And what Ceed does, and where the tools a firm already uses stay, said in the same type as the rows it wins. Where the reading corrected the comparison page, the correction is listed near the end, and the page was changed the same day.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The field, for the purposes of this post. Ignition and Anchor sell the agreement and the collection: a proposal the client signs with a payment method attached, and invoices that pull themselves. The time trackers, Harvest, Toggl Track, Clockify and Hubstaff, with Everhour beside them, sell the hour: timers, timesheets, budgets and alerts. The suites, Accelo, Scoro, Kantata and Productive, sell the whole operation to firms large enough to implement one. Each is good at the thing it sells. The rows are where the things it sells meet the things a firm has to do anyway.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-agreement"&gt;Before the first row. The agreement and the money.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The table begins at the hour, and two things happen before it: the proposal becomes a signed agreement, and the client authorizes the firm to be paid, after which invoices pull themselves. Ignition and Anchor do both, and do them well, so this is where the field is credited before the rows begin.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Start with the document. Of the claims asserted in 2023 against CPA firms in the AICPA Professional Liability Insurance Program, about three quarters came from tax work, and of those, more than half had no engagement letter at all, The Tax Adviser reported in November 2025. Sarah Beckett Ference, a risk control director at CNA, the program’s underwriter, wrote in the Journal of Accountancy in April 2026 that an advisory engagement “is determined solely by the agreement between the accountant and client,” and that when the agreement is vague or not written down, “accusations can fly and fingers can point.” She also wrote the sentence that turns the agreement into the second row: even with a good letter, “the scope of a CAS engagement often changes after it starts.” Her remedies, in order of formality, are a signed amendment, an email confirming the change and its effect on fees, or a change log reviewed with the client. All three are documents a person has to remember to write.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Then the money, which starts waiting the day the document is signed. Intuit QuickBooks’ 2026 Late Payments Report, published 7 July 2026 from a quarterly survey of about 5,000 small business owners and a December 2025 survey of 1,305, found 59% of small businesses with invoices overdue by thirty days or more, up from 47% a year earlier, and $17,700 owed on average to a business with unpaid invoices. Xero’s ledger data for the June quarter of 2026 had US small businesses paid 8.5 days late on average and waiting 29.3 days to be paid, the wait longer than the quarter before because firms had lengthened their own terms. Ignition’s 2025 survey of 273 agency leaders found 84% spending three to ten or more hours a month chasing late payments, 71% with at least one invoice in four paid late, and only 20% using billing with automated payment collection. Clio’s 2025 benchmarks, drawn from tens of thousands of law firms, put the median lockup at 93 days of annual revenue: 43 days of work done and not yet invoiced, then 32 days of invoices sent and not yet paid. Nearly half of the wait happens before an invoice exists.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement/ninety-three-days-of-lockup-forty-three-before-the-invoice-clio-2025-quickbooks-2026.svg" width="640" height="412" alt="Two panels. Left: a bar of 93 days, the median lockup of annual revenue at law firms in Clio’s 2025 benchmarks, split into 43 days of work not yet invoiced and 32 days of invoices not yet paid. Right: three tiles from the Intuit QuickBooks 2026 Late Payments Report, 59 percent of small businesses with invoices overdue by 30 days or more, up from 47 percent in 2025, and 17,700 dollars owed on average, with Xero’s June quarter 2026 figures of 8.5 days late and 29.3 days to be paid."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Where the money waits. Clio, Legal Trends Report 2025: 93 days of lockup, 43 of them before an invoice exists. Intuit QuickBooks, Late Payments Report, 7 July 2026, about 5,000 respondents a quarter. Xero Small Business Insights, June quarter 2026, published 30 July 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ignition, founded in 2013, sells exactly this problem’s remedy to accountants and agencies. Proposals, engagement letters from vetted templates, e-signature, and payment details captured at acceptance so that signing “automatically sets up the billing: schedules, payment terms, and invoicing.” Its year-end release of 4 December 2025 counted 8,500 or more customers, $3.1 billion through the product in 2025 and 91% of payments collected automatically, a figure it first published in May 2025 when it launched AutoCollect, which imports unpaid invoices from QuickBooks Online and Xero and invites clients to pay from a portal with a saved method. Instant Bill, from August 2023, charges a flat amount for out-of-scope work without a new proposal. In the same release Ignition says 78% of its customers reduced late payments and 85% saw less scope creep, both figures about its own base. Anchor, funded with a $20 million Series A in January 2025, makes the payment method a precondition of signature: “Require clients to add a payment method before allowing them to sign agreements,” then “Trigger invoicing and payment collection automatically once your agreement is signed.” Its pages say more than 21,000 firms, and its Series A release said agreement signing time fell from over 45 days to under 24 hours, a claim without a sample. Both collect money well, and on these two rows the comparison page says so.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Neither knows what the engagement cost, and neither tracks an hour. Ignition’s integrations page lists ledgers, practice management tools, Gusto, Zapier and Slack, and no time tracker. Its dashboard reports projected revenue, payments, proposals and revenue by service, and no cost. Anchor reads hours only once they have landed in QuickBooks Online from a tracker synced to it, QuickBooks Time, BigTime, Toggl and Harvest at the June 2025 launch, and checks them “against the pre-approved hourly cap” when the invoice is assembled. In both, the agreement is the schedule the client will be charged on. It is not the set of rules the hours are checked against while the work is being done, which is what the first two rows are about.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed the agreement is a terms card: the monthly cap, the rates by tier, the discount, the yearly escalator, any equity taken as payment, versioned, with the signed paperwork attached to the version. Every hour logged against the client is checked against those terms as it is logged. The signing happens before Ceed and the collecting after it. A firm signs its proposal wherever it signs today, in Ignition or Anchor or by email, enters the terms on the card, and the invoice comes out of Ceed as a frozen document that its bank, or Ignition, or Anchor, collects. Ceed is the record between the two. It never touches the money.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/agreement-terms-cash-cap-escalator-tier-rate-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="331" alt="Ceed’s terms card for a demo account: On-demand security team, contract version one since September 2026, with a cash cap of $16,000 a month, discount none, equity none, escalator per year none, and a Tier 1 rate of $400 an hour, plus buttons to edit the terms, attach paperwork and add a new version."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The agreement as rules. Ceed’s terms card on staging for a demo account, September 2026: the cap, the discount, the equity, the escalator and the rate by tier, versioned, with the signed paperwork attached to the version. The proposal that produces this card is signed wherever the firm signs today.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Jonathan Stark, who has spent a decade arguing that consultants should be paid before the work, has seven minutes on why to ask for the whole fee up front, even when you expect a no. It is the shortest argument for row two that exists.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uC3MN3tXntU"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Get Clients to Pay Faster: Get Paid 100% Upfront. Jonathan Stark, 8 min, published 5 July 2019, 4,900 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uC3MN3tXntU"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-hour"&gt;One minute a day. From Slack.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The first row is the hour itself. Everything after it is computed from entries a person made, so the row is about whether the entries get made, and whether they are true.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people who have watched the most timesheets do not think they are. Blair Enns, on 2Bobs in March 2026: “My fundamental problem with timesheets is it’s like the drunk looking for his car keys under the street lamp, not because he lost them there, but because the light’s better there.” David C. Baker, in the same conversation: “The only timekeeping sheets that are accurate are from contractors who get paid for what they do,” and “On the employee side, there’s probably more lies in timesheets than anywhere else.” The measurement behind those opinions has not changed since AffinityLive, now Accelo, surveyed more than five hundred professionals in 2014 and found time logged daily 66% accurate and time logged weekly 47%. Harvard Business Review’s write-up of the same research in January 2015 put the cost of unrecorded work at 50 million hours a day in the United States. Nothing newer with a sample has been published since, by anyone in the table.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people filling the sheets say why. When a company that automates lawyers’ time tracking launched on Hacker News in March 2024, 137 points and 118 comments, a former consultant named bdamm wrote that he had left the career track over it: “it turns out I am not physiologically able to maintain 100% focus for my entire day. So it ends up being just creative lying, which I felt bad about.” noleary: “I don’t think I ever submitted my timesheet on time.” pkilgore, a former lawyer: “Too many 1am nights cleaning up my billing.” Six months later jiggawatts described the ratio the row is named for: “it takes me a solid minute to log in to my CRM web app to submit my timesheets for the day, a task that takes only 5 seconds.” And in November 2024 an agency operator explained on the same site why he had built a Slack app for it: “we used an external tool for time tracking, but I’d often forget my timesheets.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The field agrees about Slack more than the comparison page gave it credit for, which is the first correction. Harvest has a command, “/harvest log,” documented “to log hours without starting and stopping a timer,” and sends timesheet deadline notifications into Slack. Toggl Track has “/toggl track” to add an entry by hand, and daily reminders “sent in the morning” by email or as a Slack direct message, on Premium and Enterprise. Clockify lists Slack among more than eighty integrations without a page saying what it does, and its own reminder is “Sent the next day if targets aren’t met,” on Standard and above. Hubstaff’s integrations overview lists no Slack at all. Its model is the desktop timer with activity levels and screenshots. Everhour’s Slack app posts daily and weekly summaries and time off, and logs nothing. Among the suites, Productive’s Slack app makes tasks and shares reports, Scoro’s sends notifications as direct messages, Kantata’s posts activity and is on the Enterprise plan, and none of them logs an hour. Ignition and Anchor have no hour to log. So the row reads Yes for the trackers and the suites, and the difference is what the minute contains.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed the minute is one Slack message each workday, sent only when today is still empty, carrying the hours left on each client you are booked to. The reply is the entry: the client, the hours, a line on what it was. No timer, no screenshots, and everyone sees their own hours and their own pay for the day. Because the reminder carries the budget, the person logging knows before the hour whether it will cross, which is the second row. And the month cannot invoice until each person who worked on the account has said their month is complete, which turns the deadline the field’s reminders chase into a rule the invoice waits for.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/held-not-hidden/time-tracking-log-slack-reminder-month-complete-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="479" alt="Ceed’s Time tracking page: You’ve logged 0.0 h today, your pay is $0. A form with Logging for, Partner, Date, Start, End, Duration and Description, a Log it button, scope buttons for Today, Month and Year, a note reading Done logging the month? Accounts you worked can invoice only after everyone on them says so, with a button My month is complete, and a line reading If you’re allocated on a partner this month, Slack reminds you when today is still empty."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What the person logging sees. Ceed’s Time tracking page on staging, September 2026: one form, no timer, their own pay for the day, and the two sentences that make the row. Slack reminds them only when today is still empty, and the account cannot invoice until everyone on it has marked their month complete.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The strongest case against the row is the one Jonathan Stark and Chris Do made to 276,000 people: stop selling hours, and the timesheet goes away with them. It is the right argument for a solo consultant pricing a project. For a firm of ten with a flat retainer sized in hours only the owner knows, the hours still have to be counted somewhere, which is &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;the private budget&lt;/a&gt; this blog keeps returning to.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B1b7QlQILRo"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Hourly Billing Is Nuts. Stop Trading Time For Money. Jonathan Stark with Chris Do, The Futur, 85 min, streamed 11 September 2018, 276,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B1b7QlQILRo"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;And the agency version, from the two people quoted above. David C. Baker and Blair Enns spent half an hour in October 2020 on what a firm can and cannot do with a timesheet, and it is where the figure that the average firm captures 42% of its time rather than 60% comes from.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x-mwbljeDoM"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Transcending Timesheets. 2Bobs, David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 33 min, released 7 October 2020 and published on YouTube 7 March 2022. Also on &lt;a href="https://2bobs.com/podcast/transcending-timesheets"&gt;2bobs.com&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x-mwbljeDoM"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-crossing"&gt;The moment it crosses. Or the morning after.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row two is the one the comparison page was written around, and this blog has a post on the mechanism, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt; This section is about the other four columns: what each tool does when an hour would push a client over budget, in the tool’s own words, and when.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pain has fresh numbers. Teamwork.com’s survey of more than a thousand senior services leaders for 2026 found 66% saying clients are “more demanding but less willing to pay for work,” and 27% naming clients moving the budget in the middle of a project as their top frustration. Ignition’s 273 agencies: 57% lose $1,000 to $5,000 a month to unbilled work, a further 30% lose more than $5,000, and 78% rarely or only sometimes charge for out-of-scope work. Law firms measure the same thing as write-downs. Thomson Reuters surveyed 245 partners at firms of eleven lawyers or more in 2023 and found 43% reducing a bill because the time exceeded the partner’s own expectations, against 14% who reduced it because they feared the client would challenge it. The same study put silent write-downs, hours never entered at all, at over 76 hours and nearly $47,000 per partner per year. Its 2025 survey of 315 attorneys found the average partner writing down 300 hours of their own time a year. Ryan Lazanis, who coaches accounting firms, wrote on 8 September 2026 how the overrun is usually found: “It’s rarely one dramatic moment. It’s a quick question here, a form there, an email thread that grows.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Never do “secretly free” scope changes. “Strategically free” is OK... as long as you tell the client they’re getting something special.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@KarlSakas&lt;/b&gt; · 26 August 2020 · &lt;a href="https://x.com/KarlSakas/status/1298626512623742982"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here is what the field does at the crossing, read from the help centers on 12 September 2026. Harvest’s home page says “Live alerts. Get notified before you go over.” Its help center says budget emails “are sent the morning after a project goes over the percentage threshold you set,” generated at 3:00 a.m. Eastern, then weekly until the project is archived. Clockify’s budgeting page says you can “instantly compare actual costs to your estimates,” and its help center says alerts “are generated and sent at the 30-minute mark of each hour” and an alert “won’t appear instantly,” typically arriving by email within 30 to 40 minutes, on Pro and Enterprise, for every project with an estimate or for none of them. Toggl’s alerts are a Starter feature, and its documentation says a new alert “may take up to 30 mins to take effect,” with no delivery time published. Hubstaff refuses: members “cannot add time manually to their timesheet if the project’s budget has been reached,” a toggle stops timers at the budget, and only owners and organization managers can add the time anyway. Everhour refuses everyone: its budget settings “prohibit reporting time for anyone (including admins) if the budget is exceeded,” and stop running timers at the threshold. Productive, on its Professional and Ultimate plans, refuses at the keystroke with “You can’t track this amount of time on this service because it would exceed the limit,” or in its Budget cap mode accepts the entry and refuses its approval with “This entry cannot be approved because it exceeds the budgeted total for this service,” and a running timer is cut with “Entry shortened due to budget limit.” Scoro’s Watchdog emails you when a threshold is exceeded, on a schedule you choose, hourly or daily. Accelo fires one internal note to the project manager when a budget passes 90%. Kantata shows the percentage of budget used on a tab in the project’s admin box. Anchor checks tracked time against the pre-approved cap when the invoice is written. Ignition has no hour to check.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement/when-each-tool-tells-you-the-hour-crossed-the-budget-from-the-moment-logged-to-the-invoice-2026.svg" width="640" height="709" alt="A ladder of when each tool acts on an hour that crosses a client’s budget, read from the vendors’ help centers on 12 September 2026. The moment it is logged: Ceed holds it for a named person’s decision, Productive on Professional and Ultimate refuses the entry or blocks its approval, Hubstaff refuses members’ manual entries, Everhour refuses everyone. Within 30 to 40 minutes: Clockify emails, on Pro and Enterprise. Up to 30 minutes for a new alert to take effect, no delivery time published: Toggl, on Starter and above. 3:00 a.m. Eastern the next morning: Harvest. Hourly or daily on the schedule you set: Scoro’s Watchdog. Once, when the budget passes 90 percent: Accelo’s internal note. Whenever someone opens the tab: Kantata’s budget percentage. When the invoice is written: Anchor’s cap check. Never: Ignition, which has no hour to check."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;When each tool tells you. Vendor help centers as read on 12 September 2026, sources under the post. Three shapes: a report after the fact, a refusal that removes the hour from the record, and a hold that keeps the hour and asks a person.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Three shapes, then. A report after the fact, which is Harvest, Clockify, Toggl, Scoro, Accelo and Kantata: the hour is in the record and the firm has already over-delivered by the time anyone reads the email. A refusal, which is Hubstaff, Everhour and Productive’s two limit modes: the budget holds and the hour leaves the record, which is the silent write-down Thomson Reuters measured, only now performed by software. A cap at the invoice, which is Anchor: the client is protected from the extra, and the firm has already worked it. Productive’s Budget cap is the nearest thing to a hold in the field, and it deserves the credit: the entry is kept and cannot be approved. What it lacks is the third piece, a named person asked for a yes or a no that day, with either answer on the record.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed the hour that would push a client over budget is saved, marked as held, and put in front of the account leader the moment it is logged. Approved, it goes on the invoice at the agreement’s rate with a name and a date on the approval. Declined, it stays on the record and off the invoice. Nothing is billed quietly. Nothing disappears. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"&gt;The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.&lt;/a&gt; shows the same hold as the change notice it replaces.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/today-two-hours-held-approve-with-a-reason-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="480" alt="Ceed’s Today page for a demo account: two hours held on Acme Co, logged by Tomás Aguilar, over the booked hours. The card explains that approving raises the allocation and declining keeps the hours on record and off the invoice, shows one entry and two hours held, a typed reason that reads Their CFO asked for it on Thursday’s call, bill it at the agreement rate, and two buttons, Decline and Approve."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The hold, in the product. Ceed’s Today page on staging for a demo account, September 2026: the hours past the budget, recorded, not billed, waiting for a yes or a no with a reason that goes on the record under the approver’s name.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Parakeeto’s Agency Profit Podcast walked through a client of theirs in December 2025 that will sound familiar to any firm running a small core team and a bench of contractors: just under two million in revenue, weak time-tracking habits, a half-implemented project tool, and over-servicing that nobody could see until the numbers were rebuilt.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b9kfCGU2eZU"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Set up to Fail, Even with Perfect Projects. Real Client Case Study, episode 212. Agency Profit Podcast by Parakeeto, Marcel Petitpas and Kristen Kelly, 39 min, published 16 December 2025. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b9kfCGU2eZU"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-invoice"&gt;Computed from the agreement. Shares included.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rows three and four are the invoice: computed from the agreement, with the budget, the approved extra and any equity taken as payment on it. The pain in row three is the gap between what the contract says and what the invoice says, and it is measured best where billing is a profession. Clio’s 2025 benchmarks: of the 3.0 hours a lawyer captures in an eight-hour day, 2.6 are invoiced and 2.4 collected. LexisNexis found in 2014 that 71% of law firms discounted or wrote off work before the invoice ever went out. Thomson Reuters’ 2026 rates report found worked rates up 7.4% against 2.8% inflation, and firms with opposite approaches to discounting nevertheless collecting roughly the same per hour, which means the rate card is not where the money is lost. In the wider economy, Versapay and Wakefield Research found in 2023 that 82% of companies had lost revenue to invoicing conflicts and that human error was the most common cause. For a firm of ten the error has a shape everyone recognizes: the approved extra never billed, the discount applied from memory, the cap clamped in a spreadsheet at month end, and a client who audits the result. A contractor on Hacker News in April 2024 described exactly that audit, a client questioning a period of more than twenty consecutive billed hours, and the defense being a contemporaneous record of what was done in them, which the auditor accepted.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;What the field puts on the invoice is what the field has. Ignition bills the plan: the schedule in the signed proposal, with Instant Bill as a manual flat amount for anything outside it. Anchor computes hourly billing from hours that reached QuickBooks Online, clamped at the pre-approved cap. Harvest computes invoices from tracked time, expenses or fixed fees and is the only tracker with retainers, which only administrators can create and which cannot take on a new project once set up. Toggl’s invoice is an export: “Generated invoices are not saved within the Track app.” Clockify invoices from tracked time on Standard and above and “only allows percentage-based discounts.” Hubstaff invoices from tracked time on every plan. Everhour computes from rates and syncs the draft to the ledger, but if an admin later edits invoiced time, “it does not update the invoice automatically.” Productive puts invoicing on its top plan, Ultimate. Scoro runs quotes to invoices in its Quote to Cash apps. None of them prices an approved extra as its own line from a rule in the agreement, and none has a field for equity.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row four is the one nobody in the table has. Firms that serve startups take shares as part of the fee, and have for a long time. In 2002 Fortune described a Cooley Godward client whose IPO would have earned the firm about $250,000 in fees, “on top of” which the firm held stock worth $5 million to $10 million shortly after the offering. A Cooley partner told the magazine that at the time “Everyone was requiring equity.” The firm took pre-IPO stock from 38 companies in 1999 and 59 in 2000, and the pile went from roughly $40 million at the start of 2000 to under $5 million by 2001. The practice is alive in 2026. Zypsy, a design agency, takes 1% of a startup through a SAFE for up to $100,000 of brand and product work over eight to ten weeks, TechCrunch reported in April 2024. Carta’s November 2025 data has the median advisor grant at 0.21% of a pre-seed company, 0.12% at seed and 0.05% at Series A, and the Founder Institute’s FAST agreement, revised in July 2026, sets 0.10% to 1.00% by stage and involvement. The field’s default advice is refusal. When a freelancer asked r/freelance in 2021 whether to take equity from an early client, the top reply at 53 points was “Run away. 98 times out of 100 this will be a time wasting deal for you,” and the 22-point reply beneath it: “the less someone pays the more changes they’ll ask for.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Part of why the field says run is that nobody can book it. The rules exist. Under Section 83 of the tax code, restated in Revenue Ruling 2004-37, the fair market value of shares received for services is income to the provider in the year the shares vest. Under the revenue standard, ASC 606, noncash consideration is measured at contract inception and “Changes in the fair value of noncash consideration after contract inception are excluded from revenue,” as PwC’s guide puts it. So the fee is fixed on the day the contract is signed, in the firm’s books, at a number nobody on the engagement wrote down, because the invoice said $250,000 and the timesheet said hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed the equity is a term on the terms card, at the value you agreed, and the invoice is computed from the terms: the budget, the approved extra as its own line at the agreement’s rate, the discount, the equity taken as payment, and then frozen. Margin per client counts the shares at that value from the day the agreement takes effect, which is what your accountant will need in March. The valuation is the firm’s and its accountant’s, and so is the election. Every number on the invoice is computed from a rule and the record, the same way every time.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/invoice-computed-from-approved-hours-work-detail-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="622" alt="Ceed’s invoice view for a demo account: a Draft, Generated, Submitted, Paid, Settled pipeline, net to invoice $16,000, one line for Tomás Aguilar at Tier 1, and a work detail of six dated entries totalling 40 hours, with the note that every approved entry is evidence under the charges, never a pricing input, and that the month is waiting on one open log."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The invoice, computed. Ceed’s invoice view on staging for a demo account, September 2026: the math from the agreement, then the work detail under it as evidence, six approved entries and forty hours, with the held hour left off. Nothing is issued until an owner approves it, and approving freezes it.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;For the equity row, the clearest three minutes on how startups actually grant shares to the people who help them come from Eric Migicovsky, who founded Pebble and later worked at Y Combinator.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XvlKwwKfS5c"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Startup Advisor Equity? Pebble Watch founder Eric Migicovsky. Y Combinator, 4 min, published 30 April 2019, 36,700 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XvlKwwKfS5c"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="this-morning"&gt;Margin this morning. Bookings against it.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rows five and six are the firm’s own view: margin per client, with the cost side, this morning, and people booked against both a client’s budget and their own availability. The pain in row five is the most measured number in this post. Promethean Research’s 2026 survey of 119 digital agencies, fielded in February 2026, found 59% tracking individual project margins, so 41% could not say which clients made money. The same survey has after-tax net margin at 19% for studios under ten people, 12% at ten to twenty-four, 9% at twenty-five to forty-nine and 8% at fifty or more. Margin falls across exactly the range Ceed is built for. SPI Research’s 2026 benchmark of 509 professional services firms has billable time at 66.4% of capacity, the lowest in the survey’s history, project margin at 37.7% and project overrun at 10.7%.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The stories match the numbers. Sapien, a UK advisory firm, published a case in June 2026 of a £3 million agency whose profit and loss “does not show margin by project, and it certainly does not flag which jobs lost money and why,” where a fifth of the client work was, in cash terms, free, and where measuring margin by project took net margin from 4% to 12% while billable time moved three points. In July 2026 an agency pricing consultant told r/agency about forty owners he had talked to, none of whom knew their real margin. One six-person marketing agency thought it ran at 30% “because thats what the spreadsheet said. Revenue - Salaries,” a spreadsheet that never counted the unpaid discovery calls, the free revision rounds or the Slack messages answered at nine at night. The pricing assumed 85% of time billable, the truth was 68%, and the real margin was 9%. In the same thread a former adviser described a boutique that grew from twenty people to three hundred in five years convinced it made 50% because it priced associates at twice their pay, “never made a meaningful profit,” and sold to Accenture because the alternative was running out of cash. His three leaks: discounts against list price, senior time doing work priced for junior time, and scope nobody charged for. When an agency asked the same forum in January 2025 what tool shows profit per client, the answers were “Toggl?” and “Accounting software and a spreadsheet.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement/margin-falls-as-the-firm-grows-promethean-2026-and-the-firms-that-can-see-it.svg" width="640" height="420" alt="Left: four bars of after-tax net margin by agency size from Promethean Research’s 2026 survey of 119 digital agencies: 19 percent for studios under ten people, 12 percent at ten to twenty-four, 9 percent at twenty-five to forty-nine, 8 percent at fifty or more. Right: three tiles, 59 percent of agencies tracked individual project margins (Promethean, April 2026), 66.4 percent billable time, the lowest in the survey’s history, and 37.7 percent project margin (SPI Research 2026 benchmark, 509 firms)."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Margin falls as the firm grows, and four in ten cannot see it happen. Promethean Research, How Profitable are Digital Agencies?, 19 April 2026, survey of 119 agencies fielded February 2026. SPI Research, 2026 Professional Services Maturity Benchmark, 509 firms, as summarized by Deltek, 30 July 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;What the field shows, and when. Ignition and Anchor report revenue and payments, with no cost side and therefore no margin. Harvest’s profitability report is “only available on the Harvest Enterprise plan,” is run from the Reports menu, and has its own help article on fixing the missing cost rates that break it. Toggl’s profitability lives in reports on Premium. Clockify’s cost rates are on Pro and Enterprise, and profit appears when you generate a report per project with Show Profit switched on. Hubstaff’s report list has no profitability or margin report at all, and its budget reports show spend against budget. Everhour tracks what a person costs against what you charge, in reports, on its one paid plan. The suites report margin too, after the fact: Scoro’s margin is a Watchdog threshold or a report in its Advanced Finance add-on, Kantata’s dashboards state no refresh cadence, and Productive’s custom cost rates by person sit on Ultimate. None of them claims this morning, and none of them puts the number next to the client’s budget.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row six is the same number seen forward. SPI’s 66.4% against the industry’s 75% target is roughly a day a week per consultant, unsold. Runn’s 2026 survey of the people who schedule delivery teams, with an undisclosed sample, found 44% still scheduling in spreadsheets and 9% who fully trust their scheduling data. Rob Black, who founded and runs Fractional CISO, wrote in November 2023 about the year he hired ahead of a straight-line revenue plan and cut staff in June: “Hiring in advance when you are missing your revenue plan does NOT work.” The suites are strongest here, and the page says so. Kantata’s Resource Center is the category’s benchmark, Scoro books people against a heat map of availability, Accelo schedules and reports use of time, and Productive books people against services on a budget, the closest anyone comes to booking against the agreement. Harvest sells scheduling as Forecast, a separate product on a separate bill at $5 a person a month billed annually or $6.25 monthly. Toggl’s Timeline is on Starter, Clockify’s scheduling on Pro and Enterprise, and Hubstaff’s scheduling is shifts and attendance. All of them book against people’s availability. Only Productive’s bookings know the budget.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed every hour carries who worked it, at what pay, against which client and at which rate, so revenue, people cost and cash margin are computed for each client every day and shown to the owners and to whoever they name, with who may see rates and margin enforced on the server rather than in the screen. Bookings put a person on a client for the month against two numbers at once, the client’s remaining budget and the person’s remaining capacity, so the hour that will cross is visible before it is worked. Cash is the only profit Ceed reports, and the month end it projects is computed from what is booked, never extrapolated.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/economics-invoiced-people-cost-cash-margin-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="434" alt="Ceed’s Economics page for a demo firm in September 2026. The headline reads: September, invoiced $0, people cost $6,000, cash profit minus $6,000. A note says cash is the only profit and that one client is 100% of the month’s book. Below, the projected month end: invoiced $16,000, people cost $6,000, opex $0, cash margin 62.5%, booked and never extrapolated."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Margin, this morning. Ceed’s Economics view on staging for a demo firm with one client, September 2026: what has been invoiced, what the people cost, and the cash margin the month is heading for, computed from the booked hours.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee/partner-cap-booked-leader-service-progress-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="702" alt="A client page on Ceed for a demo account, Acme Co: customer since September 2026, Slack channels, cap plus excess $26,200, booked $17,600, a delivery score missing for the month, leader Sasha, closer Jon, status active, type customer, and the service card On-demand security team, active and staffed, with a progress bar reading $17.6k completed of $26,200 a month."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Booked against the budget. A client page on Ceed’s staging environment, September 2026, demo account: the cap, what is booked against it this month, the account leader and the closer, and the service’s progress against the cap. The delivery score the client gives the month is the gate the commission waits for, two rows down.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Drew McLellan, who runs the Agency Management Institute and has the financials of more than 250 agencies in front of him, spent forty minutes with Marcel Petitpas in February 2026 on what profitability looks like at each size of firm, and why the fifteen-to-forty-person agency so often does best.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=n2IsKsc2zMI"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to be Profitable at Any Size, with Drew McLellan. Agency Profit Podcast by Parakeeto, episode 217, 41 min, published 10 February 2026. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=n2IsKsc2zMI"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-people"&gt;One set of hours. Payouts and commissions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rows seven and eight are the people who get paid from the same hours the client is billed for: the contractor’s payout statement and the closer’s commission. The pain in row seven begins with a structural fact. “Almost all fractional contracts are versions of Independent Contractor agreements (1099s),” Fractional Jobs tells the people it places, and MBO Partners counted 72.9 million independent workers in the United States in 2025, 5.6 million of them earning $100,000 or more, up 19% in a year. So the second person on a fractional practice, a security boutique or an agency is usually a contractor, and the owner pays them from a sheet she hopes matches the invoice she sent the client. When it does not, the argument is about hours. Shawn Jahromi, who runs a management consulting company, told Clockify in December 2025 how he checks a contractor’s invoice: “we check alignment between story, tickets, and calendar, not minutes.” Guillermo Triana, who runs a professional employer organization, halved his review time by making contractors replace “marketing” with lines like “2.3 hrs → wrote 800-word email series → launch 12/4,” because “Hours alone mean nothing.” A contractor on Hacker News in June 2023 described the other side: about three quarters of his code merged, a final invoice the client would pay only half to seventy percent of, and no dispute clause in the contract.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The field has one tool that pays people, and it deserves its column. Hubstaff runs payouts through Wise, PayPal, Payoneer and Bitwage and through Deel, Gusto and Remote, on its Team plan and up, weekly, every other week, twice a month or monthly, from pay rates times approved hours, and “Only approved timesheets will be included in the payroll run.” Time attached to a successful payment cannot be edited afterward, which makes it the one truly unchangeable state in the five trackers, and we come back to that in row nine. Harvest, Toggl, Clockify and Everhour take money in against invoices and pay nobody out. The suites model a contractor as a seat with a cost rate and move money out through expenses and purchase orders. Ignition and Anchor collect.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed the contractor’s statement is computed from the same approved entries as the client’s invoice, at the contractor’s rate, for the month. There is no second sheet, so there is nothing to reconcile, and the statement shows the contractor their own hours and their own pay every day, not at the end. The statement is a document. Your bank or your payroll provider moves the money, because Ceed computes payouts and never touches the money itself.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row eight is the commission, and the field for it is a spreadsheet. QuotaPath, which sells commission software, reported in May 2026 that 70% of organizations still run commissions in spreadsheets and that manual processes get 3% to 8% of total payouts wrong, and its chief revenue officer Ryan Milligan said the thing every owner who has done the math by hand knows: “A rep never says thank you for doing the math right, but they definitely get annoyed when you do the math wrong.” Jordan Rupp, who runs finance at Hona, put the error where it lives: “The mistakes in these processes typically happen when there’s some kind of handoff,” and the handoff in a firm of ten is the invoice total copied into the comp sheet. Drew McLellan has written the agency version. A “15% commission” on media is 15% of the gross, which is 17.65% on the net, and on a million dollars of media the difference is $26,500 a year, which he calls “the difference between whether the account is profitable or not.” The other half of the row is the client. Commissions paid on a booking are clawed back when the client leaves, and clawbacks are, in the words of one Hacker News commenter in September 2025, “a very common practice.” A former account manager moving into sales at a small agency asked r/agency in September 2025 what others pay on a retainer, whether a share of the first month or a share of every month, and said the one thing he wanted to avoid was quotas and unlocks, because “I just want us all to win and feel like the distribution of revenue is fair.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;No tool in the table computes a commission. Not the trackers, not the suites, not Ignition or Anchor. In Ceed the commission is computed by the firm’s own policy from the same invoice the client receives, and it is gated on the client’s rating of the month’s delivery, so a closer is paid for a client who is happy with the work, not for a signature. The rating and the commission sit on the record beside the invoice they came from, and the month’s close records a client with no rating as an open item with a name on it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two recordings for the two rows. Hector Garcia, the QuickBooks trainer most bookkeepers learn from, on setting contractors up to be paid from QuickBooks Online, which is where the field’s payout actually happens today. And David C. Baker and Blair Enns, in 2017, on the spectrum between full commission and salary for the people who bring in a firm’s business, which is the policy a firm has to write before any software can compute it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b4R_Jf20tvY"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;QuickBooks Online: Setup 1099 Contractors. Hector Garcia CPA, 8 min, published 18 January 2024, 58,500 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=b4R_Jf20tvY"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KALbnNPSaI8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The Complexities of Commission Culture. 2Bobs, David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 36 min, released 29 November 2017 and published on YouTube 3 February 2022. Also on &lt;a href="https://2bobs.com/podcast/the-complexities-of-commission-culture"&gt;2bobs.com&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KALbnNPSaI8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-record"&gt;Closed means closed. Who can reopen it.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row nine is the month closing as a record nobody can rewrite, on an append-only audit chain. The pain is quiet. “In billable hour situations, management reworking timesheets is not particularly rare,” a Hacker News commenter wrote in January 2024, in a thread about something else, as if stating the weather. The Defense Contract Audit Agency, which audits the hours behind billions of dollars of government work, explains why the record has to hold itself: “Unlike other costs, labor is not supported by external documentation or physical evidence to provide an independent check or balance.” Every other cost has a receipt from somebody else. An hour has only the record. So the agency’s guidance for contractors is that employees record their time daily, and that any change to a timesheet be documented in a way that keeps “the original time charge, the corrected time charge, and documentation from the employee indicating his/her concurrence with the change.” That is an amendment record, not an overwrite. The Federal Acquisition Regulation puts the consequence plainly: a contracting officer “may disallow all or part of a claimed cost that is inadequately supported.” The American Bar Association’s Model Rule 1.15 requires complete records of client funds to be kept for five years after the representation ends. A firm that wants to be sold, or to borrow, is asked the same question in a friendlier voice: were these books closed, and did they stay closed. On how long the close itself takes, the only large study is old, APQC’s 2017 median of 6.4 calendar days across 2,300 organizations, and the two weeks everyone quotes for small firms has no survey behind it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here is who can rewrite a closed month in the field, from the help centers. Harvest: approving a timesheet locks the week, and “If you need to edit an approved timesheet, an Administrator will need to withdraw approval from the timesheet.” Locks are set, edited and removed by administrators, and no history of edits to an entry is documented. Toggl: approved periods are locked, but “Administrators can still edit, delete, and add time in the locked period,” and its Time Audits feature finds odd entries rather than recording edits. Clockify: “Approved time entries are permanently locked and admins can’t make any edits after approval,” until an admin withdraws the approval from the archive, which emails the user and every admin. Hubstaff: most locks can be lifted by owners, but “Time associated with successful team payments cannot be edited,” and its audit log is a paid add-on in beta. Everhour: approved and invoiced time locks for everyone but admins, who can edit it directly, and if they do, the invoice does not follow. Accelo: activities lock on submission, approval and invoicing, and a timesheet has “an audit history” on a Details tab, and whether an administrator can override the lock is not stated. Scoro: a supervisor locks weeks by hand, and “Only site admins can modify read-only time entries and events.” Kantata: “You are allowed to set one lock date per account,” it “must be a Saturday in the past,” and once an administrator reopens the period users can “add, edit, or delete time entries that were previously locked,” with no trail documented. Productive: its Financial Month Closing, on Ultimate, answers edits with “Cannot update time entry/expense/service because the financial period is locked,” administrators reopen a month by clicking a padlock, invoices are not among the locked objects, and no history is documented. That last one is the second change the reading made to the comparison page. The close row said No for the trackers and the suites, and it now says No, locks an administrator can lift: the locks are credited and the verdict stands.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement/who-can-rewrite-a-closed-month-locks-unlocks-and-audit-trails-by-tool-2026.svg" width="640" height="536" alt="A grid of ten tools against four questions, read from the vendors’ help centers on 12 September 2026. Does approval or a lock stop edits: Harvest yes for the week, Toggl for members only, Clockify yes, Hubstaff yes, Everhour for members only, Accelo yes, Scoro for members only, Kantata yes, Productive yes on Ultimate, Ceed yes. Can an administrator undo it: Harvest withdraws approval, Toggl edits anyway, Clockify withdraws approval and everyone is emailed, Hubstaff yes except paid time, Everhour edits directly, Accelo not stated, Scoro site admins edit, Kantata sets an unlock date, Productive clicks a padlock, Ceed no. Is there a documented history of edits: only Accelo’s Details tab and Hubstaff’s audit log, a paid add-on in beta, and Ceed’s Activity record. Is any state unchangeable: Hubstaff’s time attached to a successful payment, and Ceed’s closed month."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Who can rewrite the month. Vendor help centers as read on 12 September 2026, sources under the post. Every lock in the field is a permission an administrator can lift, and only two tools document a history of the edits.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;In Ceed every change before the close is a new row on an append-only record: who, what, the value before and the value after. There is no edit, only an amendment that leaves the original in place, which is the shape the auditors asked for. The close freezes the invoices, the statements and the margin for the month, and nothing in it changes after. A dispute forty days later does not reopen the month. It starts a new one. Whether that meets your auditor’s requirements is your compliance lead’s call, and we answer the format questions. The rule inside the product is two words long. Closed means closed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/activity-append-only-held-to-approved-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="372" alt="Ceed’s Activity page, headed Every change, forever, append-only: actor, action, before and after. Two rows for Acme Co by Jon: a time entry changed from 42 booked hours and held to 44 and approved, and a time entry added with its description, hours and status."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The record itself. Ceed’s Activity page on staging, September 2026: every change, forever, with the actor, the action, and the value before and after. A held hour becoming approved is a new row. Nothing above it moves.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/month-close-readiness-open-items-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="302" alt="Ceed’s month close readiness panel for a demo firm: three open items, each closing as a recorded decision. Approvals queue, one open, held hours and requests freeze as is. Cap positions, every account within cap. A delivery score rule, one account with no score. Invoices, all final. Receivables, nothing overdue. Next month’s book, nothing booked."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The close, before it happens. Ceed’s readiness panel on staging, September 2026: the held hour and the missing delivery score are open items, and closing records each as a decision with a name on it. Open items never block the close. After it, nothing changes.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two recordings on the record. A specialist’s half hour on what the government asks of a contractor’s timekeeping, including the rule that a correction keeps the original, and FloQast’s six-minute explainer on what a month-end close is and how long one takes, for anyone whose bookkeeper has never had time to explain it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=olttjkWofL4"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Timekeeping Requirements for Government Contractors. DCAA Compliance, 26 min, published 28 October 2013, 1,100 views. Daily entries, the correction that keeps the original, and the supervisor’s countersignature. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=olttjkWofL4"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3W8Wu3fY7FU"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How To Do the Month End Close. A Step-by-Step Explainer. FloQast, 6 min, published 30 December 2021, 77,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3W8Wu3fY7FU"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-ledger"&gt;After the last row. The ledger and the spreadsheet.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two things happen after the table too, and they are the two systems every firm already has: the ledger where the month ends, QuickBooks Online or Xero, and the spreadsheet where the money side has lived until now. Every tool in the table syncs to the ledger, and Ceed hands the ledger documents, so this is the second place the field is credited, and the sync deserves a closer look than a cell would allow.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pain is that the sync carries less than the word suggests. Harvest’s help center: “Retainer invoices are not copied to Xero or QuickBooks Online because they are not considered income until the money taken in from that invoice is used to offset a regular invoice.” For a firm on retainers, which is most of the firms this blog is written for, the highest-value invoices are the ones the integration declines to carry. Harvest also says time and expenses “can’t be directly copied or synced” to either ledger, only as lines on an invoice, one way. Toggl: “The Track invoice and the QuickBooks invoice are not directly connected. Updating one will not update the other,” and there is no Xero. Clockify sends time, not invoices, and not to QuickBooks Desktop, not to Simple Start, and not if QuickBooks has its Payroll feature enabled. Hubstaff sends time and rates, says a direct integration for invoicing “is not yet available,” and has no Xero either. Everhour has the best story of the five: it mirrors clients both ways and exports invoices as drafts with the status read back. Ruddr, a smaller tracker, documents the retainer workaround the category shares: six setup steps and, on every invoice, a manual line that offsets the whole amount so that “This will result in a zero dollar invoice.” The suites go deeper. Accelo syncs invoices, payments, contacts, items and bills both ways with no plan gate. Scoro requires its Spend and Invoice apps. Productive syncs invoices on Professional while it only lets you create them on Ultimate. Kantata documents no native QuickBooks or Xero app at all. IDC’s study for Kantata, published in February 2026 from a hundred firms and paid for by a vendor with a conclusion in mind, still put a number on the seams: “close to 180 steps end-to-end, 40 plus documents to track” in the administrative process, and up to a fifth of skilled people’s time in administration. Deltek’s 2026 Clarity study of government contractors found 85% of firms using two to five tools on a single project and 5% fully integrated. On r/Bookkeeping in January 2026 a new S corporation owner asked why wages were counted twice, once from the Gusto connector’s journal entry and once from the bank feed, which is what two systems do to one event when nobody has told them it is the same one.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Invoices and payout statements come out of Ceed as documents for the ledger you already use, and a bookkeeper enters them, a retainer as a retainer and an approved extra as its own line, because the document says so. On the sync itself, Everhour and Accelo have the most complete story, and we say so here rather than leave it off the page.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The spreadsheet is the other system, and the field’s answer to it is implementation. Deltek’s 2026 Clarity study of architecture and engineering firms found 43% “heavily reliant on spreadsheets for accounting and invoicing.” Promethean’s 41% of agencies that do not track project margin are running their margin, if anywhere, in a sheet. And the suites built to replace it are built for someone else. Kantata wrote in July 2026 that implementation takes “6-8 weeks for mid-size orgs and 3-6 months for enterprise-scale” rollouts, that it is built for firms with “50+ billable resources,” and that this is “an intentional fit statement.” Accelo’s pricing page says most teams are up and running “in a matter of weeks.” A small-business IT supervisor on G2 in December 2025 put it at two to three months, and another reviewer was quoted more than $5,000 for training. Promethean counts 87% of the 71,000 digital agencies it evaluated at fewer than fifty full-time employees. The suites are built for the other 13%. The spreadsheet is what the 87% run on, and it is the one tool that already holds the firm’s own leak.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A firm brings its agreements and its people into Ceed by hand, on the day it signs up, and the first month is a month. There is no implementation, no onboarding fee and no minimum, and nothing to pay until the first invoice. The spreadsheet stays as long as the firm wants a second copy of what the record already holds.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The clearest twenty minutes on what two systems do to one event is Clara CFO Group’s walkthrough of how duplicates get into QuickBooks Online, and how to keep them out.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6tGb0-AzXEo"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to avoid duplicate transactions in QuickBooks Online. Financial Tech Lab by Clara CFO Group, 20 min, published 16 February 2023, 92,600 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6tGb0-AzXEo"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-price"&gt;Seats, tiers, meters. Or 0.1%.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Row ten is the price, and in 2026 it has a story. On 20 August 2026 the BBC reported that Harvest, the time tracker bought by the Italian company Bending Spoons in 2025, had told customers on old plans that their bills would rise at renewal by as much as fifteen times. Richard Haldenby, who runs the UK consultancy Salentis with up to fifteen staff and has used Harvest across three companies for fifteen years, saw his monthly bill go from $130 to $2,110. Another customer in the United States saw an annual bill go from $2,800 to $23,000. Harvest told the BBC that customers on legacy plans, some from 2011, faced the larger increases as the product had become more capable, and that they were notified thirty and ten days before renewal. Mark Peacock, a pricing consultant, told the same reporter there was no way for a customer to work out the cost until the bill arrived. On Hacker News the story reached 112 points, and a customer of thirteen years posted the renewal email: “You will be automatically billed $2,199.50 for your new monthly plan,” with a usage-based alternative estimated at $416.05. Another canceled after twenty years when the renewal came in at a 1,400% increase and, during the cancellation, fell to a 300% increase. In the r/HarvestApp thread that opened when the ownership notice arrived in January 2026, a user since 2011 predicted the pattern, and by August another had learned of the change from the credit card charge: an annual bill of about $2,000 had become about $22,000.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The model behind the numbers is the row’s subject. Until the change Harvest charged a flat fee per seat. Now its Teams plan is $9 a seat a month billed annually, $11 monthly, and Enterprise $14 and $17.50, and on top of the seats it meters projects, tasks, clients, invoices created and, on its Flex billing, the dollar amount invoiced, in tiers whose per-unit prices its pricing page does not publish. Below its top tiers it adds its own surcharge to card and bank payments on invoices. Scheduling is a separate product, Forecast, on a separate bill. A small-firm operator on Hacker News described what per-seat pricing plus tier moves feel like from below: “To run the software it makes little difference whether there are 3 users or 6 users, yet the total cost of those 3 additional users was an additional 500 dollars.” The acquirer’s model is worth knowing too. Bending Spoons listed on Nasdaq in July 2026, agreed to buy Airtable weeks before this post, and on 10 September 2026 agreed to buy Miro at an enterprise value of $1.355 billion, a company valued at $17.5 billion in 2022. Hiten Shah’s eight minutes on how the company operates what it buys had 81,700 views by the time this post went up.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Another brutal M&amp;amp;A. Miro, founded in 2011 and valued at $17.5B 4yrs ago, is getting acquired by Bending Spoons, founded 2013, at ~2.3x ARR. After Airtable, another unfortunate victim of the SaaS bust at ~10x down from peak.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@deedydas&lt;/b&gt; · 10 September 2026 · 1,900 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/deedydas/status/2098060584134873286"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6kLnodwtGh8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;This Italian startup makes $1.5B a year reviving zombie apps. Hiten Shah, 9 min, published 9 February 2026, 81,700 views. Evernote, WeTransfer, Vimeo and Meetup before Harvest. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=6kLnodwtGh8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The rest of the field prices in five shapes, all read from the pricing pages on 12 September 2026. Ignition is $39 to $399 a month billed annually, $49 to $499 billed monthly, across four tiers metered on active clients, twenty to six hundred, and users, with overage charged on the peak count in the period, plus card fees of 1.3% to 3.6% and 30 cents and bank fees from 1% and 30 cents, capped at $5, with 0.3% more above $3,000. Anchor is $0 a month and $5 per payment received, bank transfers free, cards at 2.9% and 30 cents paid by the client, and unlimited users, which is the only other price in the table that is nothing until a client pays. Toggl Track is $9 a user a month on Starter and $16 on Premium, $6 and $10.67 billed annually, and its free plan now stops at three users. Clockify is $4.99 to $14.99 a seat a month, $3.99 to $11.99 annually, and “Every active or invited user listed on your Team page occupies one paid seat.” Hubstaff is $7 to $25 a user, with a minimum of two seats and integrations gated to Grow and above. Everhour is $8.50 a seat billed yearly with a minimum of five, so its real floor is $42.50 a month for a firm of two. Scoro is $17 to $57 a user a month with a minimum of five. Productive is about $10 to $25 a user with a minimum of three, and invoicing only on Ultimate. Accelo and Kantata publish no price at all. Kyle Poyar’s 2025 survey of more than 240 software companies found seat-based pricing falling from 21% to 15% of them in a year, and his reason is the row’s thesis: “Value is disconnected with how many people are logging in.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/ten-rows-one-engagement/six-ways-to-be-charged-for-the-money-side-of-a-firm-seats-tiers-minimums-meters-payments-and-a-share-of-invoices.svg" width="640" height="520" alt="A grid of six pricing shapes against four questions. Per seat (Toggl, Clockify, Hubstaff, Everhour, Scoro, Productive): the bill rises when you hire, does not rise when you invoice more, can jump at renewal, and has minimums of two to five seats at Hubstaff, Everhour, Scoro and Productive. Tiers by feature: a feature can move to a higher tier, as invoicing sits on Productive’s Ultimate and profitability on Harvest’s Enterprise. Seats plus usage meters (Harvest): rises when you hire and when you add projects, clients, tasks or invoices, with per-unit prices unpublished. Per active client (Ignition): rises with clients on your books, plus payment fees. Per payment (Anchor): five dollars each time you are paid, regressive on small invoices. A share of what you invoice (Ceed): 0.1 percent, rises and falls with billing, no minimum, no seats, and the rate does not move."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Six ways to be charged for the money side of a firm. Pricing pages as read on 12 September 2026, sources under the post. The question the row asks is not which is cheapest at ten people. It is what the bill does when you hire, when you invoice, and at renewal.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The arithmetic, in full. A firm of ten people invoicing $1.5 million a year pays Ceed $1,500 for the year. On seats alone the trackers land nearby at that size: Clockify Pro at $959 a year, Everhour at $1,020, Harvest Teams at $1,080 before usage, Toggl Premium at $1,280. Ignition Core is $1,188 a year before payment fees, and Anchor is $5 for each payment received, so a hundred payments in a year is $500 on top of doing the collecting. The suites start higher, Productive Professional at about $2,900 a year without invoicing and Scoro’s full bundle at $6,840 before onboarding, and Accelo and Kantata will tell you on a call. On one invoice the comparison with Anchor cuts both ways: on a $1,000 invoice Anchor’s $5 is half a percent and Ceed’s is $1, and on a $20,000 invoice Anchor’s $5 is a fortieth of a percent and Ceed’s is $20. So the argument is not that Ceed is cheaper at ten people. It is the shape of the bill. It rises and falls with what you invoice and with nothing else. Adding a contractor costs nothing, a quiet month costs nothing, no feature moves to a higher tier, there is no minimum, and the rate never moves. Invoice $200,000. Pay $200. That is the pricing page.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="corrections"&gt;What we changed on the comparison page.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Reading eleven help centers in one day changed the page in five places, and the page now carries 2026-09-12. The Slack row now says the trackers log an hour with timers and slash commands, not only with timers, and that Anchor reads the hours of trackers synced to QuickBooks Online. The hold row for the trackers now says the alert comes within the hour or the morning after, since Clockify’s arrives within about forty minutes and Harvest’s at 3:00 a.m. The close row for the trackers and the suites read No and now reads No, locks an administrator can lift, which credits Harvest’s and Toggl’s timesheet locks, Productive’s month close on Ultimate, Kantata’s one lock date and Scoro’s locked weeks, none of them a record nobody can rewrite. The price row now gives Ignition’s range as $39 to $399 a month billed annually and $49 to $499 monthly, plus payment fees, gives the trackers as $4 to $25 a seat with minimums at some and usage meters at Harvest, and records that Accelo and Kantata publish no price. And the paragraph on the field now names Everhour beside Hubstaff among the tools that refuse an hour past the budget. If a row is still wrong, &lt;a href="mailto:hello@ceed.so"&gt;write to us&lt;/a&gt;, and we will fix it and say so.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Seven books, three of them on why a record has to be a record, two on standing beside a field, and two for the rows about shares and commissions.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0393088960"&gt;Double Entry&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jane Gleeson-White, 2012. How the merchants of Venice invented the ledger, and why a system that records every movement twice became the thing a business is trusted on.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0465031528"&gt;The Reckoning&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jacob Soll, 2014. Financial accountability from the Medici to the modern state, and what happens to institutions whose books stop being believed.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1449373321"&gt;Designing Data-Intensive Applications&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Martin Kleppmann, 2017. The engineer’s case for the append-only log as the source of truth, which is the row about the close in a different vocabulary.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1999023005"&gt;Obviously Awesome&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;April Dunford, 2019. Positioning as the choice of what to be compared against, which is what a comparison page is.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0684834316"&gt;Managing the Professional Service Firm&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David H. Maister, 1993. The economics of a firm of experts, including the arithmetic of margin, the ratio of juniors to partners, and the hour that never reaches the invoice.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119594820"&gt;Venture Deals&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Brad Feld and Jason Mendelson, fourth edition, 2019. How startup equity actually works, for any firm that has been offered some instead of a fee.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1260026817"&gt;Compensating the Sales Force&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David J. Cichelli, third edition, 2018. The standard text on commission plans, including the policies a firm has to write before any software can compute one.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations about the field.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 103 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are about standing beside a field of incumbents, buying fewer tools, and records an auditor will read.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;42&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/42-avery-pennarun-co-founder-and-ceo-of-tailscale-the-anti-google-a/"&gt;Avery Pennarun, co-founder and CEO of Tailscale&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;May 2024 · Building the anti-Google from the bottom up, which is what a small product does when it stands next to giants.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;63&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/63-buying-more-security-tools-you-might-be-making-things-worse/"&gt;Kabir Mathur, CEO of Leen&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;February 2025 · Buying more tools can make things worse, and the case for one record the others work from.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;56&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/56-kayne-mcgladrey-field-ciso-at-hyperproof-sec-10-k-and-leaders/"&gt;Kayne McGladrey, Field CISO at Hyperproof&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;October 2024 · What a 10-K asks a company to prove, and why documentation is the thing that survives the conversation.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If you have read this far you know which rows your firm is losing. Sign up and see them with your own numbers. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What does Ceed do that Harvest, Toggl and Clockify do not?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Three things, as of 12 September 2026. It holds an hour that would push a client over budget for a named person’s decision the moment it is logged, where the trackers email an alert afterward, Harvest’s at 3:00 a.m. the next morning and Clockify’s within about forty minutes. It computes the invoice, the contractor’s payout statement and the commission from the same approved entries and the agreement’s terms, including equity taken as payment. And it closes the month as a record on an append-only trail, where every lock in the trackers is a permission an administrator can lift. The trackers have timers, retainers at Harvest and QuickBooks and Xero syncs, and the credit for those is theirs.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Does Ceed replace Ignition or Anchor?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ignition and Anchor turn a proposal into a signed agreement with a payment method attached and collect the invoices automatically, and neither tracks an hour or knows what an engagement cost. Ceed holds the hours against the agreement, computes the invoice and closes the month, and it never touches the money. A firm runs Ignition or Anchor for the signing and the collecting and Ceed for the record in between, and the invoice Ceed freezes is a document one of them, or your bank, collects. They stay where they are.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Which time trackers refuse an hour over budget, and which hold it?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;By their own help centers on 12 September 2026, Hubstaff refuses manual entries from members once a project budget is reached and can stop timers, Everhour refuses everyone including administrators and stops timers, and Productive on its Professional and Ultimate plans either refuses the entry or accepts it and blocks its approval. Harvest, Toggl and Clockify alert afterward and refuse nothing. Anchor checks the hours against a pre-approved cap when the invoice is written. None of them holds the hour for a person’s decision with either answer kept on the record, which is what Ceed does.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Does Ceed sync to QuickBooks or Xero?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Invoices and payout statements come out of Ceed as documents for the ledger you already use, and a bookkeeper enters them. Every tool in the comparison table has a sync, and they differ: Harvest copies invoices one way and will not copy retainer invoices, Toggl creates a QuickBooks invoice it does not stay connected to and has no Xero, Clockify and Hubstaff send time rather than invoices, and Everhour mirrors clients both ways and exports invoices as drafts.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Why is Ceed priced as a share of invoices instead of per seat?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Because the bill should rise and fall with the firm. Ceed is 0.1% of what you invoice, with no seats, tiers or minimums, so adding a contractor costs nothing and a month you invoice nothing costs nothing, and the rate never moves. Per-seat tools charge for every person who logs an hour, several have minimums of two to five seats, features move between tiers, and in 2026 Harvest’s move to seats plus usage meters raised some renewals by more than tenfold. At ten people the dollars are close. The difference is what the bill does when you hire, when you invoice, and at renewal.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Is Ceed a suite like Accelo, Scoro, Kantata or Productive?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;No. The suites run the whole operation of a services firm, projects, tasks, scheduling, sales and reporting, for firms large enough to implement one, and Kantata says its own fit begins at fifty billable people. Ceed runs the money side only: the hours against each client’s budget, the invoice from the agreement, the payouts and commissions from the same entries, margin per client each morning, and the month close. Your project tool, your chat and your ledger stay where they are.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>
  <entry>
    <title>The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement</id>
    <published>2026-09-11T09:30:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>A 40-hour retainer that delivered 47, only 32 of them in the statement of work. What scope creep looks like inside a firm that sells time, where the agreement goes after it is signed, whether retainer hours roll over, and how a firm makes the agreement hold at the hour.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;Scope creep is work delivered beyond what the agreement priced, without a matching change to the price. A statement of work is the document that was supposed to prevent it: the deliverables, the hours or the fee, the assumptions, the rules for changing any of them. A change order, or change notice, is how the rules get changed. Every firm that sells time has all three. The problem is where they live. The statement of work is a PDF in a folder, the change order is a template nobody has opened since the onboarding, and the rules are in the owner’s memory, which is where the client’s small request lands on a Thursday afternoon.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;She has signed a hundred of these. The fractional CFO whose retainer says twenty hours and whose September said twenty-nine. The security boutique operator whose penetration test grew a second environment halfway through. The agency principal whose “one more revision” is on its fourth round. She wrote a good agreement. It is just not in the room when the hour is worked.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="forty-seven-hours"&gt;Forty hours sold. Forty-seven delivered.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;In May 2026 an agency owner in r/agency described a client whose retainer margin had come in at 18 to 22 percent. The owner’s first instinct was to raise rates. Six months later the firm had lost 30 percent of its clients and the rest were grumbling at every change order. The poster’s diagnosis, which the thread’s 71 comments largely accepted: “below 25 percent retainer margin is rarely a pricing problem, it’s a discovery problem.” Then the example. A retainer of 40 hours a month at €4,500, priced at 75 percent billable, so 30 billable hours expected. Month three, actual delivery 47 hours. “of those 47, only 32 were in the SOW. other 15 were small stuff. quick fixes, small changes, while you’re in there can you also do X. margin collapsed from projected 28 percent to actual 11 percent.” And the line that matters: “raising rates wouldn’t have fixed it. the 15 hours of out of scope work would still happen.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/forty-hours-sold-forty-seven-delivered-thirty-two-in-the-statement-of-work.svg" width="640" height="380" alt="Bar chart of one month on a 40-hour retainer at 4,500 euros: 30 billable hours planned, 47 delivered, of which 32 were in the statement of work and 15 were out of scope. Planned margin 28 percent, actual 11 percent. From an agency owner’s account in r/agency, May 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;One month on a 40-hour retainer, as described by an agency owner in r/agency, 8 May 2026. Fifteen hours of “while you’re in there” took the margin from 28% to 11%, and a rate rise would not have touched them.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The numbers around that story are not kind. The Project Management Institute reported in 2018 that 52 percent of projects completed in the previous twelve months had experienced scope creep or uncontrolled changes to scope, up from 43 percent five years earlier. McKinsey and the University of Oxford, studying more than 5,400 large IT projects in 2012, found they ran on average 45 percent over budget and 7 percent over time while delivering 56 percent less value than predicted. Closer to firms of ten, Ignition’s 2025 survey of 273 agency leaders found 57% losing $1,000 to $5,000 a month to unbilled work, 30% losing more than $5,000 a month to scope creep, and 78% saying they rarely or only sometimes charge for out-of-scope work. Its 2022 survey of 506 American accounting firms found 88% had delayed or avoided the awkward conversation, and 43% simply absorbed the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/scope-creep-by-the-numbers-pmi-mckinsey-ignition-2012-2025.svg" width="640" height="410" alt="Six tiles: 52 percent of projects had scope creep, up from 43 percent five years earlier (Project Management Institute, 2018), 45 percent over budget for the average large IT project (McKinsey and Oxford, 2012, 5,400 projects), 57 percent of agencies lose 1,000 to 5,000 dollars a month to unbilled work, 30 percent lose more than 5,000 dollars a month to scope creep, 78 percent rarely or only sometimes charge for out-of-scope work (Ignition, May 2025), and 43 percent of accounting firms absorb out-of-scope work (Ignition, August 2022)."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Scope creep by the numbers. Sources: Project Management Institute, Pulse of the Profession 2018, via PM Network, July 2018. McKinsey and the BT Centre for Major Programme Management, University of Oxford, October 2012. Ignition, May 2025, 273 agencies, and August 2022, 506 accounting firms.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Bent Flyvbjerg has spent a career on the largest version of the problem. His database of more than 16,000 projects in 136 countries produced what he calls the iron law of megaprojects, that they run over budget and over time, over and over again, and his 2023 book with Dan Gardner, How Big Things Get Done, is about the handful that did not. The lesson that survives the trip from a rail tunnel to a forty-hour retainer is his first one: think slow, act fast. The time to decide what is in scope is before the work, when a change costs a conversation, not during it, when a change costs fifteen hours nobody billed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=goZYw5oAAKk"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Bent Flyvbjerg on Megaprojects. EconTalk with Russ Roberts, 65 min, recorded 25 May 2015 and published on YouTube 31 March 2020. The iron law, and why estimates are wrong in one direction. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=goZYw5oAAKk"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-change-notice"&gt;A change notice, ready to go.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The r/consulting thread on scope creep, 128 points, is mostly gallows humor, but the practical replies agree on one thing: the answer to a new request is a document, not a discussion. u/waffles2go2: “SOW is my bible, if you want ARCs we can do that, but if it’s not in scope, and we don’t have the hours? Nope, nope, nope.” u/lawtechie on the request that always comes: “My favorite is when the client will demand something that they wanted but cut out of the SOW to meet budget.” And u/Wheres_my_warg on the method: have a change notice ready to go, greet the request warmly, send the notice the same afternoon with thankful language, and “usually, you get paid for it, or they back off and you at the least have a paper trail.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The freelancer who lost $2,300 on a landing page learned the same lesson at retail price. Hired for twenty hours at $100, they said yes to a blog section, a new color scheme and one more copy revision, and delivered forty-three hours for $2,000. The top reply, at 102 points, reframed the request as good news with a condition: “It’s a good sign the client is asking you to do more work. That also means that you should communicate up front that those activities are additional work that will be billed accordingly. Without their written approval you won’t be doing the work.” Another put the client’s side plainly: “Most of the time clients expect that it’s going to cost more, but if you don’t say anything, neither are they.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4FwjP2WT4vI&amp;amp;t=284s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Prevent Scope Creep. Mike Clayton, Online PM Courses, 10 min, published 20 May 2020, 89,000 views. Define the scope, show the documentation, negotiate the change. The player starts at the section on negotiating changes, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4FwjP2WT4vI&amp;amp;t=284s"&gt;4:44 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Michael Janda ran a creative agency for years before selling it, and his eight minutes on charging for changed scope is the agency version of the same method: a detailed agreement, a watch on the hours as they happen, and an addendum for every change, signed before the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iG4e9ece2A8&amp;amp;t=326s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Charge More When Clients Change the Scope. Michael Janda, 8 min, published 7 August 2025. The player starts at the section on addendums, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iG4e9ece2A8&amp;amp;t=326s"&gt;5:26 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Google’s Project Management Certificate teaches the same thing to people who will manage scope from inside a company rather than sell it. Stanton, a program manager at YouTube, tells the story of a project whose scope changed at the last minute and what he did about the people, which is the half of scope creep that no document handles.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tkrE25qP8G8&amp;amp;t=52s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Ways to Manage Scope Creep. Grow with Google, from the Google Project Management Certificate, 3 min, published 4 August 2021. The player starts at the section on managing stakeholders, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tkrE25qP8G8&amp;amp;t=52s"&gt;0:52 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two people who have watched a great deal of scope creep said it shorter, on X. Jonathan Stark, in April 2021:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;The customer is always right about what they want. They are rarely right about what they ask you to do.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@jonathanstark&lt;/b&gt; · 28 April 2021 · &lt;a href="https://x.com/jonathanstark/status/1387656350264668163"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;And the satirical trade paper Adweak, in a headline from August 2018 that 480 agency people recognized: “Clients Can’t Help But Burst Into Laughter After Agency Explains That Latest Request Is ‘Out Of Scope’.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The agency podcasts have covered the same ground for years. Drew McLellan’s Build a Better Agency had Ryan Meo on in September 2021 to talk about &lt;a href="https://agencymanagementinstitute.com/podcasts/ryan-meo/"&gt;scaling without scope creep&lt;/a&gt;, and Meo’s line has stuck: “The only way to scale a service-based business is by learning how to say ‘no’ appropriately.” Jonathan Stark’s Ditching Hourly spent three minutes in December 2020 on &lt;a href="https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/how-to-avoid-scope-creep-on-a-value-priced-project/id1165456720?i=1000501146288"&gt;avoiding scope creep on a value-priced project&lt;/a&gt;, and the answer was the one in this post: define the scope by outcome and write the change process into the agreement. Parakeeto’s Agency Profit Podcast went deepest, with Tiffany Kemp, a contracts specialist, on the clauses that hold.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ai_RSGlPIMQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Avoid Scope Creep. Contract Strategies for Agencies, with Tiffany Kemp. Agency Profit Podcast by Parakeeto, 33 min, published 12 May 2025. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Ai_RSGlPIMQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="do-the-hours-roll-over"&gt;Do the hours roll over?&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The retainer is where the agreement is vaguest, because it was sold as availability and is delivered in hours. Google’s own autocomplete for “retainer hours” offers “do retainer hours roll over,” and r/freelance asks it regularly. In 2022 a freelancer on a ten-hour retainer asked what happened to the money in months with less than ten hours of work. The 34-point answer: “Typically, the money is yours, as the point of retainer fees is that the client is paying to reserve your time.” Then the only question that ever settles it: “What does your contract say?”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In January 2026 a developer proposed moving all their occasional clients onto a five-hour monthly retainer with no rollover, and the replies were unanimous that the no-rollover clause was the whole point. “No rollover is key, otherwise you’ve just made your deadline problems worse,” wrote u/unwavering. u/jfranklynw added the sales language and the trap: pitch it “as priority access to your time rather than a prepaid block of hours,” because when you just say hours do not carry over, “some clients hear ‘I’m paying for nothing in quiet months.’” The overflow question got its answer in a 2021 thread from u/boycottSummer: tell the client when they are close to the end of the retained hours, have an hourly rate that starts after that, and take a deposit for the next block.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;MSPs have the same argument under a different name. Block hours or block money, asked r/msp in 2025. u/Beauregard_Jones was unimpressed by both: “Block hours is just another form of break-fix. They’re paying in advance for your hourly work.” u/CK1026 saw the deeper cost: “If you go back to selling time, you’re not selling the outcome anymore… you’ll have to justify any time you spend.” And u/Joe-notabot asked the question the contract has to answer and usually does not: what happens at the end of the month, do the hours or the money roll over. Even the rounding is a clause. In a 2021 thread on billing increments, one freelancer rounded to fifteen minutes in business hours and sixty after hours, and added the sentence that makes it enforceable: “Both of those intervals are in my contract.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The quiet month is the retainer’s other failure. In 2019 a designer on a twenty-hour retainer asked r/freelance what to do about a month with less than twenty hours of work, and the top answer, at 69 points, was the definition: “you are paid to be available for those 20 hours, whether you have the work or not… you would effectively have to say no to other work.” The practical reply came from u/crabthief: “during weekly calls, I make sure to inform the client about the amount of hours left.” That sentence is the whole discipline. The client who knows the count every week never asks where the hours went.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Some firms are giving up on the model. Two days before this post went up, an agency owner in r/agency was ready to drop the retainer model in favor of a ninety-day handover, and the most useful reply was caution: “retainers get messy… I’d test it on one account before you blow up the model that pays rent.” In r/msp this February, an owner whose client refused to use the services it was paying for heard from a peer who reads that as a signal: when clients start doing the work themselves, it is the first sign they will not renew. A retainer the client is not using is a retainer the client is already re-pricing in their head.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/retainer-block-hours-block-money-what-rolls-over-and-what-happens-at-the-crossing.svg" width="640" height="400" alt="Three ways a services firm sells a month, compared on four lines: what the client buys, what happens to unused hours, who watches the count during the month, and what happens when the count is crossed. A retainer buys availability, unused time does not roll over unless the contract says, nobody watches until the invoice, and the crossing becomes a conversation later. Block hours buy a prepaid number of hours, rollover is decided per contract, the firm keeps the count, and the crossing becomes a top-up invoice. Block money buys a prepaid balance drawn at the agreed rates, the balance carries, the firm watches the balance, and the crossing becomes a top-up. In every case the agreement decides, and in most firms the agreement is a PDF."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Three ways to sell a month. The agreement answers all four questions on the day it is signed. The firm’s tools usually answer none of them on the day the hour is worked.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pricing people say the retainer is the most misunderstood contract in professional services. Michael Zipursky, whose Consulting Success firm surveys consultants every year, warns that “without clear boundaries, retainer relationships can quickly turn into unlimited consulting for a fixed fee,” and that “hours-based retainers train the client to watch the clock and roll over unused time, which erodes the relationship.” Taylor Crane of Fractional Jobs, who sizes the standard fractional retainer at $10,000 a month for about ten hours a week, names the retainer’s cost in one line: “There’s a natural incentive for scope creep, which means you’re working for less than you expected.” Dallas Alford, a fractional CFO, gives the fix as contract language: “Document your response times and request types you’ll handle. Also specify extra fees for work outside the retainer scope.” Jonathan Stark’s five minutes on pricing a retainer when the scope is not yet known is the clearest version of the pricing question.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nGguMmaaWBQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Pricing Retainer Fees Without Knowing the Scope. Jonathan Stark, 5 min, published 29 November 2019, 11,000 views. Two ways to structure a retainer when the client cannot tell you what they will need. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nGguMmaaWBQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;For the document itself, Mike Clayton’s seven minutes on the statement of work covers the forms most firms never use, including the level-of-effort statement of work, which is the honest name for a retainer.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1picY6dlLOc&amp;amp;t=270s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What is a Statement of Work (SOW)? And what are the different types? Mike Clayton, Online PM Courses, 7 min, published 5 October 2022, 30,000 views. The player starts at the level-of-effort form, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1picY6dlLOc&amp;amp;t=270s"&gt;4:30 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="after-too-long"&gt;Correcting it after too long.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hardest version of the problem is the one that has been allowed for years. In June 2025 someone at a growing MSP asked r/msp how to start charging for work that had been free since the founders’ handshake days, without infuriating clients who had done nothing wrong. The best answer, from u/roll_for_initiative_, was a script: “As we grow and get more into shape with formal processes, we’re looking back and seeing that we’re spending a lot of time on X with you guys. That’s technically not included in our bundled service and it’s weighing your numbers down.” u/Kawasakison asked the first question, “What’s in the contract?” u/TBTSyncro offered the quietest fix: “Document time spent on ‘non-billable’ work, and give them regular reports. Let it be their decision.” And one owner preferred a different conversation entirely: “I’d rather have a conversation of having to go up on rates because of inflation or some other reason than trying to explain your going to start charging for something that’s been free.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Thomas Ptacek, who co-founded two security consultancies, described the professional standard in a 2024 Hacker News comment: “When your project blows up, the professional thing to do is to resolve the problem with the client before billing another hour over the SOW.” The alternative, he wrote, is optimistic invoicing, and the other alternative is the one Dillon Towey of Franchise Resource described to Ignition in 2023: a $600-a-month fixed fee sized for six hours that regularly took eight, ten or twelve, and for a long time the firm would “just take it in the shorts.” Nicolaas Spijker of Rock put the whole mechanism in one sentence in April 2026: “Budgets do not go over all at once. They go over in small, invisible increments that add up in month three.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;David C. Baker and Blair Enns gave an episode of 2Bobs to it in September 2022, under a title we will let them explain. Two lines from it belong in every firm’s onboarding. One: “there is almost always some degree of underpricing and/or over-servicing, which is all tied around scope creep.” And the conclusion: “The firms that are populated with adults who are willing to have difficult conversations are the ones making more money.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DZN65GTC5d0"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Prostitutes and Scope Creep. 2Bobs, David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 31 min, published 28 September 2022. Also on &lt;a href="https://2bobs.com/podcast/prostitutes-and-scope-creep"&gt;2bobs.com&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DZN65GTC5d0"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;For accounting firms, where the fixed fee meets the client who keeps a shoebox, the Jason On Firms podcast spent five minutes in August 2026 on the one system its host says stops scope creep.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K6OEk5pR22c"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;This One System Stops Scope Creep in Accounting Firms. Jason On Firms Podcast, 5 min, published 12 August 2026. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K6OEk5pR22c"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="prove-the-hours"&gt;Prove the hours.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;When the agreement has not been in the room, the invoice becomes the first place the client meets the hours, and the client counts. In August 2026 an agency owner asked r/agency whether a client had ever asked them to prove the hours behind an invoice, and then ran about twenty-five private conversations on the question. The summary is the best thing written on the subject this year: “The question is common, real disputes are rare. The trigger is usually a bad surprise somewhere else… It is rarely distrust of you specifically. More detail does not settle it. Hours that map to something the client remembers happening do.” One reply’s example became the thread’s shorthand: “reworked the Q3 plan after your Tuesday call” settles a question that “strategy work, 3 hours” never will. The firms that never get asked, the post concluded, are “the ones whose clients see the work as it happens… When the invoice is the first thing the client has seen since kickoff, the counting starts.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;u/ThatGuytoDeny165 described the agreement doing its job: “we present a plan before we start with a list of things we are doing… that the client signs off on as the scope of work and how we plan to use their hours. Once they sign that it doesn’t matter.” Shawn Jahromi, who runs a management consulting company, told Clockify in December 2025 how he checks a contractor’s invoice: “we check alignment between story, tickets, and calendar, not minutes.” The hours have to map to events. The agreement has to have been visible while the events happened.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is a school that says the whole idea is a mistake. Allen Holub, who teaches agile software development, put it this way in December 2022:&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;“Scope creep” is a waterfall concept. If you’re agile, scope changes continuously…&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@allenholub&lt;/b&gt; · 23 December 2022 · 253 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/allenholub/status/1606336440899715075"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;He is right about software a company builds for itself and half right about work a firm does for a client. Scope can change every week if the price changes with it. What a firm that sells time cannot survive is scope that changes while the fee stays where the agreement left it, and the agreement is the only thing that connects the two.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The agreement shelf is older than the pricing shelf, and most of it was written by consultants about consulting.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1394177305"&gt;Flawless Consulting&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Peter Block, fourth edition, Wiley, 2023. The contracting conversation, which is where scope is actually decided, and how to have it as an equal.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0684834316"&gt;Managing the Professional Service Firm&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David H. Maister, 1993. Still the book on how a firm of experts makes money, including the arithmetic of the engagement.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1982157100"&gt;The Trusted Advisor&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David H. Maister, Charles H. Green and Robert M. Galford, twentieth anniversary edition, 2021. Why the client who trusts you does not count your hours, and how that trust is earned in the first meeting.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0593239512"&gt;How Big Things Get Done&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Bent Flyvbjerg and Dan Gardner, 2023. Think slow, act fast, from the largest database of project outcomes there is.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0143118757"&gt;Getting to Yes&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Roger Fisher, William Ury and Bruce Patton, revised edition, 2011. The change-order conversation as a negotiation about interests rather than positions.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0321918681"&gt;Burn Your Portfolio&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Michael Janda, 2013. The agency owner from the recording above on the parts of the business that school never taught, contracts included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1605440604"&gt;The Business of Expertise&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David C. Baker, 2017. Positioning, which is what lets a firm say no to the fifteen hours in the first place.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-agreement-as-rules"&gt;The agreement as rules, not a PDF.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We ran a security consultancy on those agreements: caps in a contract, rules in cells, the change order a template we meant to use. The month it failed us is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"&gt;The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.&lt;/a&gt; What we built treats the agreement as the rules the hours are checked against, at the hour, rather than as a document read at the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A client’s agreement in Ceed carries the retainer, the budget in hours, the rates by role, the rounding, the discounts and any equity taken as payment. Every hour logged against that client is checked against those rules as it is logged. If an hour would push the client over the budget, Ceed holds it for approval: the hour is saved, marked as held, and put in front of the account leader for a yes or a no that day. Approved, it goes on the invoice at the rate in the agreement, with a name and a date on the approval. Declined, it stays on the record and off the invoice. That is the change notice u/Wheres_my_warg keeps ready to go, produced by the hour itself, on the afternoon the request arrived rather than in month three.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A held hour, the change order at the hour"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Northwind&lt;/b&gt; · September&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip"&gt;Held&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="fig"&gt;&lt;b&gt;41.0&lt;/b&gt; &lt;span&gt;of 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="meter" data-m="97.6"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="entry"&gt;Wed 23 Sep · 1 h · “While you’re in there”, mail rules · Tomás A.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class="status"&gt;Held for approval. 1 h over the client’s budget. Out of the statement of work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="verbs"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approve&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;Decline&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/the-hold-today-one-hour-held-for-approval-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="664" alt="Ceed’s Today page for a demo firm: three items in front of you. Needs you: Tomás Aguilar, one hour held on Acme Co. Acme Co has no delivery score this month. Acme Co’s invoice is ready, $16,000 invoiceable, nothing is billed until you approve it. The open item reads: over booked hours, held for approval, Tomás Aguilar on Acme Co, one hour past their booked hours, recorded and not billed, with a field for the reason and Decline and Approve buttons."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The hold, in the product. Ceed’s Today page on staging for a demo account, September 2026: the forty-first hour on a forty-hour agreement, recorded, not billed, waiting for a yes or a no with a reason that goes on the record under the approver’s name.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The fifteen hours of “while you’re in there” do not disappear from the record and do not slide onto the invoice. They stack up as held hours with names on them, which is exactly the document u/TBTSyncro wanted to hand the client: the non-billable work, itemized, so the client can decide. The client hears about the extra before the invoice, not on it, so the counting never starts. The retainer’s rollover rule, whichever one the contract chose, is a rule the budget follows rather than a question for the end of the month. And because the invoice is computed from the agreement, an approved hour past the budget appears on it as its own line, at the rate the agreement set for that role.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement/time-tracking-ledger-forty-one-hours-one-held-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="778" alt="Ceed’s time tracking page for the same demo account: Tomás has logged 41.0 hours in September. A ledger of seven entries against Acme Co, dated 1 to 10 September, six approved and the last one, an hour of mail routing rules described as not in the statement of work, marked Held."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The ledger the client can be shown. Time tracking on Ceed’s staging environment, September 2026: seven entries, forty approved hours, and the one hour of “while you’re in there” marked held in the same list, with what it was for.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;What Ceed does not do is write the agreement or negotiate the change. The rules are yours, and the yes or the no is a person’s. It also does not show the client the hours as they happen. The account leader sees the held hour, decides, and tells the client the way she would have anyway, except on the day it happened. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt; shows what the person who logged the hour sees, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;They see the fee. You see the hours.&lt;/a&gt; is about the private hour budget under a flat retainer, and the pricing side of the 11% margin is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;The rate was set on day one. The client grew.&lt;/a&gt; Where each tool in the field stands on the crossing is on the &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;comparison page&lt;/a&gt;, dated.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations about the document.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 103 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are about the documents a firm signs and lives by.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;51&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/51-tony-thai-founder-and-ceo-of-hyperdraft-revolutionizing-legal/"&gt;Tony Thai, founder and CEO of HyperDraft&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2024 · From software engineering to law firm work to automating the documents themselves, including the ones that define scope.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;37&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/37-founders-guide-to-compliance-the-introduction-soc2-iso-nist-pci/"&gt;Founders’ guide to compliance, with Jon McLachlan and Sasha Sinkevich&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;February 2024 · SOC 2, ISO, NIST and PCI for founders, which is where half of a security firm’s scope comes from.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;14&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/14-biff-clark-cybersecurity-specialist-and-owner-of-coefficient-of/"&gt;Biff Clark, owner of Coefficient Technologies&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;March 2022 · Fifteen years of running a small security consultancy, agreements included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If your agreements say forty and your months say forty-seven, sign up and see the product with your own numbers. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is scope creep?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Work delivered beyond what the agreement priced, without a matching change to the price. It arrives as small requests, quick fixes and “while you’re in there,” and the Project Management Institute found in 2018 that 52 percent of projects had experienced it in the previous year. The remedy in every practitioner thread is the same: a written scope, a change notice for anything outside it, and a watch on the hours while they happen rather than at the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Do unused retainer hours roll over?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Only if the contract says so. The usual position, and the one practitioners recommend, is that a retainer buys availability and unused hours do not carry over, because rollover turns a quiet month into a double-sized busy one. Whatever the contract says, the firm needs a running count of the hours against the retainer during the month, and a rule for what happens when the count is crossed. In Ceed the budget follows the agreement’s rule and the hour that crosses it is held for approval.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is the difference between block hours and a retainer?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;A retainer is a recurring fee for availability and a defined scope, usually sized in hours but sold as access. Block hours are a prepaid quantity of hours drawn down as work is done, and block money is a prepaid balance drawn down at the agreed rates. Block hours and block money are hourly billing paid in advance, which is why an MSP owner in r/msp calls them another form of break-fix. All three need the same thing from the firm’s tools: a count kept during the month and a decision at the moment the count is crossed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is a change order?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;A written amendment to the statement of work that adds, removes or changes deliverables, hours or price, signed by both sides before the changed work is done. Practitioners keep a template ready so that the answer to an out-of-scope request is the document itself, sent the same afternoon. In Ceed the equivalent decision happens at the hour: the hour that would cross the agreement is held, and the account leader approves or declines it that day with a reason on the record.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>

  <entry>
    <title>The rate was set on day one. The client grew.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved</id>
    <published>2026-09-03T09:10:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>An $1,800 client that doubled. A $1,000 retainer while the client grew tenfold. A contract that said $40 while the invoices said $45 for eighteen months. Undercharging is a number nobody re-read. What the threads say, what the pricing people say, and how a firm sees margin per client before the invoice does.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;Undercharging is a rate that no longer covers the cost of delivering the work at the margin the firm needs. The definition is dull and the mechanism is not. A rate is set once, on the day the client signs, when the firm is smallest and the client is most in doubt. The client then grows, or the work does, or the firm’s own costs do, and the rate stays where it was because it lives in a document nobody re-opens. The effective rate, the fee divided by the hours it now takes, falls a little every month, and nothing in the firm is built to notice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;She has one of these clients. Probably three. The fractional CFO whose first client is now four times the company it was. The security boutique whose oldest retainer predates half the team. The agency principal who knows, without opening the numbers, which logo on the website is costing her money. She is not bad at pricing. She priced correctly, once, and then the world moved.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-client-that-doubled"&gt;The client that doubled.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;In June 2026 an MSP owner posted in r/msp that he had lost a client of ten years without a single complaint. The client paid $1,800 a month, had grown from twenty users to forty-five, and had woken the owner at four in the morning more than once. The thread drew 140 points and 197 comments, and the top reply, with 268 points, did not offer condolences. “You were doing all of that for an $1800/month client who has 45 users? You are way better off without them. You should be billing at a minimum 4-5x that per head.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The same month, in r/agency, an owner asked whether a $1,000 monthly retainer was too low. The clients they had signed at that rate had grown from $10,000 months to $80,000 and $100,000 months. “You are severely undercharging,” said the first reply, and another, from a business owner who had done exactly this, advised raising the price on new clients first. Nobody had changed. The client had, and the rate had been set for the client that no longer existed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When a long-term client told an MSP owner in February 2026 that they could no longer afford the contracted price, the detail that mattered was how it surfaced: the owner had “finally decided to look at one of his invoices (his admin usually does and just pays it).” The most useful reply was not about the client at all. “Look at the gross margin on the account,” wrote u/Revolutionary-Bee353. “If it’s &amp;gt; 60% you should have some room to negotiate.” Everything in that thread turned on a number the owner could not see: what that client, specifically, was worth to the firm after the hours it consumed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The correction goes wrong when it arrives as a surprise. In a May 2026 r/agency thread about losing retainer clients without warning, one owner described losing a business-to-business client after raising the monthly retainer 60% at the six-month mark. The client’s objection was the timing more than the number, that “you cannot raise 60% price after 6 month,” and the owner’s reason was the one in every thread here: “we weren’t saving the enough margin on our side.” The rate was wrong on day one and the client was told on day 180. Another reply in the same thread gave the client’s side in a sentence: “clients dont care how many hours you worked they care if their number moved.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A bookkeeper’s pricing guide in r/Bookkeeping, 114 points in April 2025, gets at why the first number is so often wrong: “It’s not enough to know the number of accounts and number of transactions. You need to know the COMPOSITION of those transactions.” The rate is set on a count. The work is set by a composition. The two drift apart as the client changes, and nothing in the firm is built to notice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/effective-hourly-rate-falls-as-hours-rise-on-a-fixed-15000-retainer.svg" width="640" height="380" alt="Chart of a $15,000 monthly retainer as the hours it takes rise from 160 to 200 to 240. The effective hourly rate falls from $93.75 to $75.00 to $62.50, crossing the firm’s $75 loaded cost per hour. At 240 hours the month loses $3,000. Worked example from Arron Bennett, Bennett Financials, June 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The fee stands still while the hours rise. Arron Bennett’s worked example: a $15,000 retainer that takes 240 hours at a $75 loaded cost is an $18,000 month sold for $15,000. Bennett Financials, 15 June 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Arron Bennett, who does the books for agencies, described the mechanism in June 2026: “The extra hours get logged under the client, the retainer fee stays fixed, and the effective hourly rate on the account drops month by month.” Rayhaan Moughal of Sidekick Accounting put numbers on the slope in July 2026: ten unbilled hours a month at £50 takes a retainer’s margin from 60% to 52%, twenty takes it to 43%. Promethean Research’s 2026 survey of 119 digital agencies found after-tax margins of 19% for firms under ten people and 9% for firms of twenty-five to forty-nine, and that only 59% tracked margin by project at all. The firm gets bigger, the rate stays put, and the margin goes where nobody is looking.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-40-percent-raise"&gt;The 40 percent raise.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;A post in r/smallbusiness this year, with 1,235 points and 217 comments, is from an owner who ran a small marketing firm for three years on rates set when the owner had no experience and needed any client at all. In October the owner did the arithmetic: after the hours, software, taxes and three years without a raise, the business was paying its owner about $14 an hour. The owner emailed all twenty-two clients that rates would rise 40% in January, with three months’ notice. Seven left at once, most of them the ones who haggled over everything. Two negotiated a smaller increase. Thirteen stayed. Monthly revenue rose about 12% and the workload fell by roughly a third, because the clients who left had been the most demanding and the least profitable. “I kept it really simple,” the owner wrote of the email. “No long justification or apology.” The scariest part, the post said, was not the increase but “the 3 months of waiting between sending the email and the new rates kicking in.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/raise-rates-40-percent-lose-7-of-22-clients-revenue-up-12-percent-workload-down-35-percent.svg" width="640" height="340" alt="Before and after a 40 percent rate increase at a small marketing firm: 22 clients became 15 (seven left, two negotiated a smaller rise, thirteen stayed), monthly revenue rose about 12 percent, and workload fell about 35 percent. Reported in r/smallbusiness, February 2026, 1,235 points."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;One firm’s 40 percent raise, as reported by its owner in r/smallbusiness, 23 February 2026, 1,235 points and 217 comments. Fewer clients, more revenue, a third less work.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The thread’s 217 comments were mostly people who had done the same and wished they had done it sooner. The top one, at 627 points: “If you’re selling $2 beers, expect a $2 beer crowd.” Another, at 298: “the clients who leave are usually the ones you’re better off without anyway.” McKinsey measured why the arithmetic works so well back in 2003, in a piece that pricing consultants have quoted ever since: for the average company, “a price rise of 1 percent, if volumes remained stable, would generate an 8 percent increase in operating profits,” an effect the authors found nearly 50 percent greater than a 1 percent cut in variable costs and more than three times the effect of 1 percent more volume. A firm that sells time has almost no variable cost to cut. Price is the lever it has.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Alex Hormozi, who writes about pricing for owners of small companies, compressed the finding into one line in June 2025, and 4,100 people agreed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Until customers tell you your prices are too high, they’re probably too low.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@AlexHormozi&lt;/b&gt; · 4 June 2025 · 4,114 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/AlexHormozi/status/1930268623098261787"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The market moved without asking, too. In February 2022 CNBC reported a survey in which 47% of small businesses said they would have to raise prices because of inflation. Whatever those firms did next, a firm whose rate card still says what it said in 2021 has cut its price in real terms every year since, without deciding to.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PHh_spidewQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;47% of small businesses say they will have to raise prices due to inflation. CNBC Television, 31 seconds, published 14 February 2022. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=PHh_spidewQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gIw-PBNXWgE&amp;amp;t=52s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How Do I Raise Prices Without Losing Clients? The Futur, Chris Do and Joel Pilger coaching an illustrator through her first raise, 13 min, published 26 August 2018, 416,000 views. The player starts at the section on existing customers, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gIw-PBNXWgE&amp;amp;t=52s"&gt;0:52 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Blair Enns, whose Win Without Pitching Manifesto is the pricing text many agency owners keep on a shelf, is blunter: what you do does not matter to the market if you cannot command a premium for it. Eight minutes of him on the point are below. Alex Hormozi’s &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Gy-RmpRif-I"&gt;walk-through of the price-rise letter he actually sent to customers&lt;/a&gt; is the practical companion.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfyHSbfUCrQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Why You Must Raise Your Price. Blair Enns with Chris Do, from the Win Without Pitching Manifesto readings on The Futur, 8 min, published 1 April 2021, 39,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=sfyHSbfUCrQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;And when the client says the price is too high, Chris Do’s role-play of the conversation has been watched two million times for a reason.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RFk8ZmIDrFM"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;When Client Says Your Price Is Too High. Chris Do, The Futur, 13 min, published 26 December 2019, two million views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=RFk8ZmIDrFM"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-invoice-nobody-re-read"&gt;The invoice nobody re-read.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Sometimes the number that drifts is not the rate but the record of it. A technical writer in r/freelance discovered, on going to raise their rate, that the contract said $40 an hour and the invoices had said $45 for at least eighteen months. The writer had charged $40 for the first few months, then changed it, then “just used the last invoice as the template going forwards. Nobody noticed.” The 266-point thread split on whether to refund the difference, and the most useful comment asked the question that decides it: “Do your invoices show the hourly rate x the hours or are you just sending them a bill for the full amount?”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The mirror image is in r/msp, where an owner found the firm had been under-billing a client for a long time and asked whether to recoup it. The 52-point answer: “correct the billing for future invoices but consider the past mistakes my mistakes and let it go.” Another owner had eaten eighteen months of it: “we under billed you by x thousand but we will not be billing this, here’s your new msa.” Both firms found the gap the same way, by reading an invoice against a contract, months late, because the invoice was copied from the last one rather than computed from the agreement.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;These are not pricing failures. They are record failures. The rate lived in a PDF, the hours lived in a timesheet, the invoice lived in a template, and the three met once a month in a person who was tired. The month our own spreadsheet did that to us is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"&gt;The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="eating-hours"&gt;Eating hours is a price cut made by the wrong person.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The quietest form of undercharging is the hour that never reaches the invoice. In August 2026 an accountant in r/Accounting asked how common it was to eat hours and said he had eaten close to 200 that year after being “explicitly asked not to bill time.” The top reply, at 236 points, refused: “I bill what I work. Partners have a problem with that? Quit selling an audit that takes 2.5 months as a 6 week audit for 30k.” The reply that explained the damage came from u/Background_Map6056: “eating hours to avoid going over budget is poisoning the data you are trying to collect.” Every eaten hour tells next year’s budget that the work takes less than it does, so next year’s price is set on a lie.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people doing the eating know exactly what is happening. In June 2025 an associate in r/Accounting wrote that they had followed the firm’s instruction not to eat hours, recorded thirty extra hours honestly on an engagement that took longer than it was sold for, and were written up for “lack of efficiency and time management.” The thread reached 1,271 points and 225 comments. The top reply, at 1,081 points: “everyone eats hours but tells you not to… timesheets are definitely more art than science.” Another, at 318: “You get yelled at for eating hours, then you get yelled at for billing your actual time. It’s a lose lose.” And the translation, from u/Curveoflife: when they say do not eat your hours, “They mean dont ever mention that you are eating your hours.” A budget maintained that way is not a budget. It is a story the firm tells itself about how long the work takes, and the price is set on the story.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;David C. Baker’s measurement of the same thing across creative firms, 42% of hours captured against the 60% a well run firm captures, is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed#missed-not-lost"&gt;our first post&lt;/a&gt;. Ignition’s 2022 survey of 506 American accounting firms found 43% absorbing out-of-scope work rather than raising it with the client. An eaten hour is a discount, decided by the most junior person in the room, recorded nowhere, and repeated next year because the record says the work was cheap.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="what-the-pricing-people-say"&gt;What the pricing people say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pricing literature for firms like these is large and mostly agrees with itself. Ron Baker has argued for thirty years that professional firms should price the value and abandon the timesheet, and his hour with Chris Do is the best introduction to the argument there is.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TB54_6bEP-A"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What Makes People Buy? Price &amp;amp; Value Masterclass with Ron Baker. The Futur, 58 min, published 22 September 2022, 442,000 views. Baker on why the hour is the wrong unit and what to price instead. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TB54_6bEP-A"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Harvard Business Review’s IdeaCast had Rafi Mohammed, founder of the consulting firm Culture of Profit, on the question of when to raise prices and how to be transparent with customers when you do. The player below starts at his section on knowing when to raise them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aR-xxF4-vMU&amp;amp;t=1022s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Pricing Strategies for Uncertain Times. HBR IdeaCast, Harvard Business Review, with Rafi Mohammed, 21 min, first broadcast in July 2020 and published on YouTube 22 February 2023. The player starts at the section on knowing when to raise your prices, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aR-xxF4-vMU&amp;amp;t=1022s"&gt;17:02 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Boston Consulting Group’s pricing practice frames the same move for larger companies as leaving the cost game for the value game, and Rohan Kadakia’s four minutes on it below are the clearest short statement of what changes when a firm stops pricing from its costs.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XUS4UyvTNt8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Moving from the Cost Game to the Value Game. Boston Consulting Group, Rohan Kadakia on the Strategic Pricing Hexagon, 4 min, published 20 May 2024. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XUS4UyvTNt8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The market has heard all of this and mostly still sells hours. Consulting Success surveyed nearly a thousand consultants for its 2026 fees study: 30% price by project, 29% by the hour, 16% by monthly retainer, 15% by value, and 10% by the day. Seventy-nine percent said they were actively looking to raise their fees, and 39% had never tried value pricing because they did not know how. The Fractional Work Report 2026, from 1,733 fractional executives, found 46% billing primarily on a monthly retainer, and an average rate of $223 an hour. Even the retainers are sized in hours. Blair Enns declared in March 2026 that “labor-based pricing is dead,” and in the same conversation David C. Baker allowed that “selling your time by the hour, I don’t think it’s a sin necessarily. It’s just more the whole system around it that doesn’t allow for you to capture some of the value.” Jonathan Stark, who agrees with Enns, warned in August 2026 that for consultants who switch to fixed fees “the hours almost always sneak back in.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/how-consultants-price-project-hourly-retainer-value-daily-consulting-success-2026.svg" width="640" height="400" alt="Horizontal bars showing how nearly a thousand consultants price: project-based 30 percent, hourly 29 percent, monthly retainer 16 percent, value-based 15 percent, daily rate 10 percent. Below, 79 percent are actively looking to raise their fees and 39 percent have never tried value pricing because they do not know how. Consulting Success, 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Five ways to price. Consulting Success, Consulting Fees Study, nearly 1,000 consultants, published 1 May 2026 and updated 7 September 2026. Hourly, daily and the hour-sized retainer between them are more than half.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;David C. Baker and Blair Enns have argued about all of this on their podcast, 2Bobs, for the better part of a decade. Their May 2026 episode on pricing resentment is the one for the owner with a client that outgrew the rate. Resentment, they point out, only arises in existing client relationships, because it is the gap between the value you now deliver and the price you agreed when you did not yet know. One line from the episode, about a deal that had gone wrong for the speaker, is this whole post in one sentence: “I should have structured the deal so that my pay was highest when my value was.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=991j7GkAhWc"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Pricing Resentment. 2Bobs, David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 20 min, published 20 May 2026. Also on &lt;a href="https://2bobs.com/podcast/pricing-resentment"&gt;2bobs.com&lt;/a&gt;. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=991j7GkAhWc"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Their February 2025 episode asks &lt;a href="https://2bobs.com/podcast/who-should-set-prices"&gt;who in a firm should set prices&lt;/a&gt; at all, and answers against the org chart: “Pricing responsibility should not be tied to title or seniority. It really should be tied to aptitude.” Which is a polite way of saying that the founder who set the day-one rate is not automatically the right person to reset it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Jonathan Stark’s position fits in a post on X, and has since 2018.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Q: What’s your rate?&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A: I don’t have one.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Q: So how do you price?&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A: I give you a price.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@jonathanstark&lt;/b&gt; · 11 October 2018 · &lt;a href="https://x.com/jonathanstark/status/1050603472238796800"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Six months later he added the reason: “Your time is the most valuable thing you have. Stop selling it like it’s sack of onions.” His eleven minutes on the hourly trap are the argument in full. Harvard Business Review had Rafi Mohammed back on the IdeaCast in May 2025 to &lt;a href="https://hbr.org/podcast/2025/05/rethink-your-pricing-strategies-amid-economic-uncertainty"&gt;rethink pricing amid economic uncertainty&lt;/a&gt;, the follow-up to the episode above, which was first broadcast in July 2020.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9aHZDLMW4U4"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The Hourly Trap. Jonathan Stark, 11 min, published 10 February 2022. Why the hour caps the income of everyone who sells it. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=9aHZDLMW4U4"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;We take the last two seriously. However a firm prices, the hours are its cost. A fee with no hour count under it is a rate nobody can check, and a rate nobody checks is the one in every thread above. The question is not whether to count the hours but who sees the count, and when.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The shelf for this post is the pricing shelf. Most of these authors appear above, and they disagree with each other less than their titles suggest.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0470584610"&gt;Implementing Value Pricing&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Ronald J. Baker, Wiley, 2010. The book-length case against the timesheet, from the accountant who has made it longest.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1999523504"&gt;The Win Without Pitching Manifesto&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Blair Enns, 2010. Twelve proclamations, one of which is We Will Charge More. His fuller pricing text, Pricing Creativity, is sold from his own site, and his newest, &lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0DCCZL2D7"&gt;The Four Conversations&lt;/a&gt;, is about the four a firm has with a client, the one about the price included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0D91GR548"&gt;Hourly Billing Is Nuts&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jonathan Stark. Short and blunt, and the source of the argument in the two recordings above.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119776929"&gt;Value-Based Fees&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Alan Weiss, third edition, Wiley, 2021. The consultant’s version, with the scripts for the conversation.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/3319203991"&gt;Confessions of the Pricing Man&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Hermann Simon, 2015. The founder of the pricing consultancy Simon-Kucher on how price actually works, including why one percent matters so much.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0061684325"&gt;The 1% Windfall&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Rafi Mohammed, 2010. From the IdeaCast guest above, on the same one percent.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119240867"&gt;Monetizing Innovation&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Madhavan Ramanujam and Georg Tacke, Wiley, 2016. Price before you build, which for a firm means price before you staff.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1794390146"&gt;The Psychology of Graphic Design Pricing&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Michael Janda, 2019. The agency owner from the recordings in our other posts, on the numbers a creative firm quotes and why.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1605440604"&gt;The Business of Expertise&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David C. Baker, 2017. Why positioning comes before price, from the other half of 2Bobs.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="margin-per-client"&gt;Margin per client, this morning.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We ran a security consultancy for years with the rate in a contract, the hours in a spreadsheet and the margin in nobody’s head, and we built Ceed so that the three numbers live in one place and meet every day instead of once a month.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The rate lives in the agreement, by role. When the hours are logged against a client, Ceed computes what that client cost and what it earned, and margin per client is visible this morning to the owners and to whoever they name. The account with the 60% margin and the account with the 11% margin are both on one screen, and the conversation about raising the rate starts with the hours in hand rather than with a feeling.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/agreement-terms-cash-cap-escalator-tier-rate-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="331" alt="Ceed’s terms card for a demo account: On-demand security team, contract version one since September 2026, with a cash cap of $16,000 a month, discount none, equity none, escalator per year none, and a Tier 1 rate of $400 an hour, plus buttons to edit the terms, attach paperwork and add a new version."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Where the rate lives. The agreement on Ceed’s staging environment for a demo account, September 2026: the monthly cap, the discount, any equity taken as payment, the yearly escalator and the rate by tier, versioned, with the signed paperwork attached to the version. There is a field for the escalator so the rate that never moved has somewhere to move from, and a rate that changes leaves a version behind it.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="Margin per client, the morning after the close"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Margin by client&lt;/b&gt; · August 2026&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Closed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Acme Co · 40 h retainer · 38.5 h logged&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;61%&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Beacon Ltd · 32 h retainer · 31.0 h logged&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;54%&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Cobalt Inc · $1,800 flat · 26.5 h logged&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;11%&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Firm&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;47%&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;Computed from the hours and the agreements. The account that pays $1,800 for 26.5 hours is the one to talk to.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved/economics-invoiced-people-cost-cash-margin-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="434" alt="Ceed’s Economics page for a demo firm in September 2026. The headline reads: September, invoiced $0, people cost $6,000, cash profit minus $6,000. A note says cash is the only profit and that one client is 100% of the month’s book. Below, the projected month end: invoiced $16,000, people cost $6,000, opex $0, cash margin 62.5%, booked and never extrapolated."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The same numbers in the product. Ceed’s Economics view on staging for a demo firm with one client, September 2026: what has been invoiced, what the people cost, and the cash margin the month is heading for, computed from the booked hours and never extrapolated. Cash is the only profit.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;When the hours cross a client’s budget, Ceed holds the hour for approval rather than letting it slide onto the invoice or into the eaten pile. The person who logged it knows at once, the account leader decides that day, and the client hears about the extra before the invoice. That is where the rate conversation actually happens: not in a yearly letter, but in the month the client outgrows the agreement, with the specific hours that prove it. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt; shows the hold from the inside, and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;They see the fee. You see the hours.&lt;/a&gt; is about the private hour budget under a flat retainer.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The invoice is computed from the agreement, so the $40 that became $45 by copy-and-paste cannot happen: the rate on the invoice is the rate in the agreement, or it is an approved change with a name and a date on it. The same hours produce the contractor’s payout statement, so a rate change for the client and a rate change for the person doing the work are one record, not two spreadsheets. And when the month closes, the margin is frozen with it, so the 11% is a fact about August rather than an argument in October. What Ceed does not do is set your prices. Enns, Baker, Stark, Mohammed and Kadakia are better at that than software will be. It shows you, every morning, which clients the prices no longer fit.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations with people who set a price.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 102 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are with people who have had to put a number on their own work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;7&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/7-michael-brooks-vciso-and-director-of-cyber-risk-services-at/"&gt;Michael Brooks, vCISO and Director of Cyber Risk Services at Trava&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2021 · The fractional CISO model from someone who runs it, and what a fraction of a CISO is worth.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;28&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/28-david-carpe-how-to-network-and-the-myth-of-the-great-silent/"&gt;David Carpe on how to network&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;May 2023 · Where the clients come from before there is a price to set. Every practice in the threads above was built on referrals.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;102&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/102-ciso-does-not-spell-ceo/"&gt;Chris Kirschke, founder of Kyberis AI&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2026 · Twenty-seven years in security operations, then a venture studio asked him to run a company, revenue included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If you have a client whose rate was set for a company that no longer exists, sign up and see the product with your own numbers. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How do I know if I am undercharging?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Divide each client’s monthly fee by the hours that client actually consumed, including the unbilled ones, and compare the result with your loaded cost per hour and the rate you would quote a new client today. If the effective rate is below either, the client has outgrown the agreement. Most firms cannot do this arithmetic because the hours are not recorded per client, which is why the discovery usually happens at the invoice or when the client leaves.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How do I raise rates with existing clients?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The owners who have done it agree on the shape: raise the price on new clients first, give existing clients written notice of two to three months, keep the letter short with no apology, and expect the clients who haggled most to leave. The owner who raised rates 40% in r/smallbusiness lost seven of twenty-two clients and saw revenue rise 12% with a third less work. McKinsey’s classic finding is that a 1 percent price rise, at stable volume, lifts operating profit by about 8 percent.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is margin per client?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;What a client paid in a month, less what the hours logged against that client cost the firm at the loaded rate of the people who worked them, expressed as a share of the fee. Promethean Research found in 2026 that only 59% of digital agencies track margin by project. In Ceed it is computed from the hours and the agreement and visible to the owners the morning after the close, and it is frozen when the month closes.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How often should a consultancy raise its rates?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pricing writers quoted here converge on once a year at minimum, written into the agreement as an escalator so the rise is a clause rather than a negotiation, plus a re-price whenever the client’s size or the scope changes materially. The owners in the threads who waited three years or ten paid for the wait in margin, and the ones who raised prices with two to three months’ written notice mostly kept the clients worth keeping. Ceed keeps the escalator and the rate by tier on the agreement, versioned, and shows margin per client every morning, so the question comes up when the numbers move rather than when a client leaves.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>

  <entry>
    <title>The client paid late. The invoice was later.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/late-paying-clients"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/late-paying-clients</id>
    <published>2026-08-27T09:10:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>The average US small business invoice is paid nine days late and the wait is growing. What late payment looks like inside a firm that sells its team’s time, the four things practitioners agree on, the part of the delay that belongs to the firm, and the stop loss that lives at the hour.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;A late payment is an invoice paid after the date the agreement set. That is the whole definition, and it hides the harder half. For a firm that sells time, the money was earned on the day the hour was worked. The invoice for that hour goes out at the end of the month, or a few days into the next one, then waits out its terms, then waits out the client. By the time the cash arrives the firm has carried the hour for two months and paid the person who worked it twice over.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;She knows the feeling. The principal of a fractional CFO practice, the operator of a security boutique, the owner of a twelve-person agency. She did the work, on time, sometimes early. The invoice went out. Then the silence, the polite nudge, the second nudge, the call she rehearses in the car. She is not bad at business. She is waiting on two clocks, and she only ever looks at one of them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-numbers"&gt;Nine days late, and the wait is growing.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Xero reads the ledgers of its small business customers every quarter. For the March 2026 quarter in the United States, invoices were paid 9.0 days late on average, up from 8.4, and firms waited 28.8 days to be paid, up from 28.3. QuickBooks put a dollar figure on the same picture in January 2025: among 2,487 American small businesses surveyed, those with outstanding invoices were owed more than $17,000 each.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;For agencies, Ignition’s 2025 report on pricing and cash flow, from 273 managers and executives, found that 71% have at least one in every four invoices paid late, 56% say it typically takes two weeks to two months after the due date to get paid, and 84% spend three to ten or more hours a month chasing what they are owed. Sixty-three percent describe their cash flow as unpredictable. The big firms see it from above. PwC’s Working Capital Study for 2025 and 2026, across more than 17,000 companies, shows days sales outstanding rising from 47.3 days in 2015 to 50.0 in 2024, and Deloitte’s 2025 roundup of 2,300 companies records that days sales outstanding “rose as collection pressures persisted.” The clients are paying everyone later, not only you.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/late-payment-by-the-numbers-xero-quickbooks-ignition-pwc-2025-2026.svg" width="640" height="360" alt="Five tiles of late payment statistics for services firms: invoices paid 9.0 days late and 28.8 days to be paid (Xero, March quarter 2026), more than $17,000 owed per small business with outstanding invoices (QuickBooks, 2025), 71 percent of agencies with at least one in four invoices late and 84 percent spending three to ten or more hours a month chasing (Ignition, 2025), and days sales outstanding rising from 47.3 to 50.0 days between 2015 and 2024 (PwC)."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Late payment by the numbers. Sources: Xero Small Business Insights, March quarter 2026. QuickBooks late payments report, January 2025, 2,487 firms. Ignition, 2025 Agency Pricing and Cash Flow Report, 273 respondents. PwC Working Capital Study 25/26, more than 17,000 companies.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-thread"&gt;The thread with 657 comments.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;In November 2024 a graphic designer posted in r/smallbusiness that net 30 and net 60 terms were wrecking her cash flow. She delivered on time and then waited two months, and asked how she was supposed to pay contractors and software in the meantime. The thread drew 484 points and 657 comments, and the comments were not sympathy. They were the same four instructions, over and over, from people who had already learned them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The top reply, with 606 points, was four words: “Then switch to pay on delivery.” Below it, u/Stabbycrabs83 priced the terms themselves: “Have different pricing for different payment terms. You are charging a premium for that 60 day term right?” u/JeffTS gave the contractor’s version, “50 down, 50 before handing off deliverables,” and u/2buffalonickels described what a small firm actually did: “For many longstanding customers we’ve gone down to a net 10 or 15 because they were stringing us out 45-60. I’ve changed a lot of my billing practices to weekly instead of monthly.” One designer put it flatly: “In a creative business, I learned early on to never ever offer those payment terms.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;X says it shorter. A designer’s post from June 2023 has been liked 1,400 times and seen by nearly half a million people, and it is one sentence long.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Net 30 is crazy but net 60 is insane…&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@itscloudnai&lt;/b&gt; · 28 June 2023 · 1,420 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/itscloudnai/status/1674147281422131210"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Nick Huber, who runs a self-storage business and writes about small business to a large audience, had the sharpest version of who pays late, in September 2023. It was liked 2,400 times.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;$100 customer: Can you come early? I have a little extra I need you to do as well. Can you stay longer? This didn’t work out as well as I expected I need to talk about the bill. Can you call me please right away?&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;$10,000 customer: Send invoice. Thx.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@sweatystartup, Nick Huber&lt;/b&gt; · 3 September 2023 · 2,437 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/sweatystartup/status/1698313894425403863"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Blake Emal had said the same thing with three price points the year before: the $100 client needs it by midnight, does not care that it is out of scope and cannot pay, the $10,000 client has one tweak, and the $1 million client says “Cool, invoice paid.” Read the two together and the lesson is not that big clients are kind. It is that terms, scope and payment travel together, and the client who argues about one will argue about all three.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Jonathan Stark, who has spent a decade arguing that consultants should stop selling hours, gets to the same place from the other side. His advice is to ask for the whole fee up front, and to ask even when you are sure you will not get it, because the terms you end up with are better than the terms you would have started from.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uC3MN3tXntU"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Get Clients to Pay Faster: Get Paid 100% Upfront. Jonathan Stark, 8 min, published 5 July 2019. Why the ask matters even when the answer is no. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uC3MN3tXntU"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Dave Ramsey’s business channel gives the operator’s version of the same rule in fourteen minutes: decide the terms before the work, put them in writing, and collect at the moment the client is happiest, which is delivery.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CgSYM8ieo-8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The Simple Way to Get Your Clients to Pay on Time. EntreLeadership, 14 min, published 24 November 2023, 22,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=CgSYM8ieo-8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="overdue-is-the-norm"&gt;Overdue is the norm.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Zoom out and the picture does not improve. Atradius, the trade credit insurer, reported in September 2025 that in the United States 43% of business-to-business sales made on credit terms are overdue, and that bad debts now write off 5% of the invoices that go long overdue. The Federal Reserve Banks’ Small Business Credit Survey, published in March 2026 from 6,525 employer firms, found that the most common reason a small firm sought financing was to meet operating expenses, at 56%. Read those two together: nearly half of what a firm is owed arrives late, and more than half of the firms that borrow do so to cover the gap between the work and the cash.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/overdue-is-the-norm-atradius-federal-reserve-uk-government-2025-2026.svg" width="640" height="410" alt="Six tiles: 43 percent of US business-to-business credit sales are overdue and 5 percent of long-overdue invoices end as bad debt (Atradius, September 2025), 56 percent of US small firms that borrowed did so to cover operating costs (Federal Reserve, March 2026, 6,525 firms), late payment costs the UK economy 11 billion pounds a year and closes 38 businesses a day, and the new UK cap on payment terms for large firms paying small suppliers is 60 days (UK Government, May 2026)."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Overdue is the norm. Sources: Atradius, B2B payment practices trends in North America, 17 September 2025. Federal Reserve Banks, 2026 Report on Employer Firms, 3 March 2026, 6,525 firms. UK Government press release on the Commercial Payments Bill, 19 May 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The United Kingdom put a national number on it this year. On 19 May 2026 the government introduced the Commercial Payments Bill with a press release that called it the largest crackdown on late payment in more than 25 years: late payments cost the economy £11 billion a year and close 38 businesses every day. The bill caps the terms large firms can impose on smaller suppliers at 60 days, sets statutory interest at 8% above the Bank of England base rate, and gives the Small Business Commissioner the power to investigate poor payment practice, adjudicate disputes and fine the worst offenders, with fines the release described as worth tens of millions for persistently late payers. The Commissioner’s office explained the bill to small firms in 45 seconds.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1Hra1kEw-U8"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What does the Commercial Payments (Late Payments) Bill mean for your small business? The Small Business Commissioner, United Kingdom, 45 seconds, published 5 August 2026. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=1Hra1kEw-U8"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is no American equivalent for commercial work. The federal Prompt Payment Act binds government agencies, and the state prompt-payment statutes mostly bind construction, so for a consultancy, an agency or a fractional practice the only late-payment law that applies is the one written into its own agreement.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="follow-your-contract"&gt;Follow your contract.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;When the client has not paid at all, the advice gets shorter. In r/msp, a technician asked what the firm should do when a client does not pay. The top answer, at 95 points, was three words from u/dumpsterfyr: “Follow your contract.” The second, from u/ntw2, was to “inform your client that you will be stopping work until their overdue” balance is settled. The third, from u/whatsforsupa, drew the line that matters inside a firm: “techs do not make this call.” The decision to stop belongs to the owner, and it belongs in the agreement before it is ever needed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A freelancer in r/freelance showed what that looks like when it works. Owed $12,000 by an agency that had already been paid by its own client, he set a deadline of a few days for the full amount, said work would stop the moment it passed, and said legal proceedings would follow a week after that. The agency paid. What he had was not a collections process. It was a line he was willing to hold, written down before the money was late.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The other lesson in these threads is about size. When an MSP owner described a client who had gone silent owing about $1,300, the replies were unanimous that the amount was not worth a court date, and one, from u/Due_Lake94, named the real safeguard: “The key for me is to have a ‘stop loss’ so I don’t wake up with a client owing me 6-12 months of work.” The stop loss is a limit on how much unpaid work a client can hold at once. Most firms have one. Almost none of them have it anywhere but in the owner’s head.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xImX7ZJHXqE"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Handle Clients Who Don’t Pay. Michael Janda, who built and sold a creative agency, 17 min, published 18 May 2019, 40,000 views. The escalation ladder from reminder to stopped work, and when to fire the client. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xImX7ZJHXqE"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="nobody-read-the-ledger"&gt;Nobody was reading the ledger.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;In August 2026 someone who had taken over billing at a family company posted in r/smallbusiness that they had found a customer owing nearly $200,000. The balance dated from 2022. The customer, another small business, said it had never known about the balance and never received the invoices. The thread reached 656 points and 190 comments, and the top reply, at more than a thousand points, was policy rather than sympathy: “All current orders go to pre-pay or COD until balance is paid in full.” A former accountant added the uncomfortable inference: if a receivable that size could sit unnoticed for three years, “there are other things wrong with the books.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The $200,000 is unusual. The mechanism is not. A receivable is a fact about the past that nobody in the firm is paid to look at, and it ages quietly until somebody new opens the ledger. When a bicycle painter in r/smallbusiness described his first small-claims hearing in February 2025, the reply with 407 points was seven words long: “Good to win small claims, hard to collect.” Another owner in the same thread said his firm carries $60,000 to $100,000 in receivables at any time on net 30 and net 60 terms, and that “the only thing we can continue to do is improve upon our accounts receivable process.” Neither firm was doing anything wrong. Both had built a business in which the money arrived long after the work, and neither had a number in front of them every morning that said how much was outstanding and how old it was.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-invoice-was-late-first"&gt;The invoice was late first.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Here is the part the threads do not dwell on, because everyone in them is angry at the client. Before the client was late, the invoice was late. The hours were typed in from memory on Friday, or the following Tuesday. The month closed over three days of the owner’s time. The invoice was assembled in a spreadsheet, checked, sent on the fourth or the fifth. Then the terms started.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;A consultant in r/consulting did the arithmetic in 2023, after a client paid in forty-five days on a contract that said ten. Monthly invoicing, one reply pointed out, “means invoicing is 30 days after the first hours were worked for the client, so payment is 60 days after the first hours worked.” Sixty days, and that is a client who pays on time.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/two-clocks-the-firm-delay-before-the-invoice-and-the-client-delay-after-it.svg" width="640" height="360" alt="Timeline from an hour worked to cash received, in two parts. The firm’s clock: the hour is worked mid-month, the month closes, the invoice is written and sent about five days later, roughly 20 days of the firm’s own delay. The client’s clock: 30 days of terms, then 9 days late (Xero, March quarter 2026). About 59 days from the hour to the cash."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Two clocks. The first belongs to the firm and runs before the invoice exists. The second belongs to the client and runs after it. Only the second one gets complained about.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Then a third delay, which is a dispute. Clio measured it across the legal profession in its 2025 Legal Trends Report: in an eight-hour day lawyers capture 3.0 billable hours, invoice 2.6 of them, and collect 2.4. Some of the gap between invoiced and collected is clients who cannot pay. More of it is clients who will not pay a number they were not expecting. In August 2026 an agency owner asked r/agency whether a client had ever asked them to prove the hours behind an invoice, then went and had twenty-five conversations about it. His conclusion: “When the invoice is the first thing the client has seen since kickoff, the counting starts.” An invoice that carries a surprise is an invoice that will be paid late, and every day it spends in dispute is a day the firm added, not the client.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;So the firm’s side of the wait has three pieces. The days between the hour and the invoice. The days the invoice takes to write. And the days it spends being argued about because it told the client something for the first time. All three are the firm’s to shorten, and none of them require a single client to change.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="profit-is-not-cash"&gt;Profitable. Not paid.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;A firm can be profitable on paper and unable to pay its own people on Friday, which is the whole reason the wait matters. Harvard Business School Online has the two-minute version of why profit and cash are different numbers, and it is worth two minutes of anyone who runs a firm on retainers and net 30.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lkEtgnhsV04"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Cash Flow vs. Profit: What’s the Difference? Harvard Business School Online, 2 min, published 2 February 2023, 112,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lkEtgnhsV04"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ignition’s agencies described the consequence in the same 2025 survey: 82% had delayed or canceled hiring or an investment because of cash flow. For a firm of eight, that is the ninth hire who never arrives, paid for by hours that were worked in March and collected in May. NerdWallet’s &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pi0CRab6raA"&gt;seven ways to deal with late-paying clients&lt;/a&gt; is the calm, professional version of the thread above. The cautionary tale is EntreLeadership’s &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BVQGi9FJPeg"&gt;caller who used client deposits to pay his debts&lt;/a&gt;, which is what happens when the two clocks are managed from the same bank account.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The longer treatment is half an hour from EntreLeadership on cash flow in a business that has to pay its people before its customers pay, which is every firm in this post.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nP4JU39whr0"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Cashflow Secrets for Long-Term Business Success. EntreLeadership, 31 min, published 11 December 2023, 125,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nP4JU39whr0"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Josh Aharonoff, a fractional CFO, walks through what a receivables ledger should tell an owner, how to age it, and what days sales outstanding means for a firm that bills monthly.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SzmgqIpkLGY"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Everything you need to Know About Accounts Receivable. Josh Aharonoff, Your CFO Guy, 11 min, published 16 July 2024, 94,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=SzmgqIpkLGY"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Four books for the owner who wants the long version. None of them is about software.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/073521414X"&gt;Profit First&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Mike Michalowicz, 2017. Take the profit out first and run the firm on what is left, which is the discipline that makes a late payment survivable.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0989645231"&gt;Simple Numbers, Straight Talk, Big Profits&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Greg Crabtree, 2014. The four numbers a small firm actually runs on, and why cash is the one the owner should read every week.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1422119157"&gt;Financial Intelligence for Entrepreneurs&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Karen Berman and Joe Knight, Harvard Business Review Press, 2008. The chapter on receivables, days sales outstanding and what an aging report is for.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0062407805"&gt;Never Split the Difference&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Chris Voss with Tahl Raz, 2016. A former hostage negotiator on the call you rehearse in the car, including the one about the unpaid invoice.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="what-ceed-does"&gt;The stop loss lives at the hour.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We ran a security consultancy on those spreadsheets, and our invoices went out on the fourth or the fifth like everyone else’s. The month that made us build Ceed is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"&gt;The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.&lt;/a&gt; What we built does three things to the firm’s side of the wait, and is honest about what it does not do to the client’s.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;First, the stop loss moves out of the owner’s head and into the agreement. Each client has a budget in hours, and if an hour would push a client over it, Ceed holds that hour for approval the moment it is logged. The account leader approves or declines it that day, and the client hears about the extra before the invoice, not on it. That is u/Due_Lake94’s stop loss, applied at the hour instead of at the sixth month, and it is the one thing that happens here and nowhere else. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt; shows what the person who logged the hour sees.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A held hour, the stop loss applied at the hour"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Beacon Ltd&lt;/b&gt; · September&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip"&gt;Held&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="fig"&gt;&lt;b&gt;32.5&lt;/b&gt; &lt;span&gt;of 32 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="meter" data-m="98.5"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="entry"&gt;Thu 24 Sep · 2 h · Vendor review · Priya S.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class="status"&gt;Held for approval. 0.5 h over the client’s budget. The client hears today, not on the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="verbs"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approve&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;Decline&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Second, the invoice is computed from the agreement, not typed. The retainer, the budget, the rates by role, the approved hours past the budget, the discounts: it comes out the same way every time and matches what the client signed because it was made from what the client signed. When the month closes, the invoice exists. The fourth and the fifth go back to being ordinary days.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="An invoice computed the day the month closes"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Invoice&lt;/b&gt; · Beacon Ltd · September 2026&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Computed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Monthly retainer · 32 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$7,200.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approved hours past the budget · 0.5 h at $225.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$112.50&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$7,312.50&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;Month closed 30 Sep. Invoice computed the same day. Nothing typed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/invoice-computed-from-approved-hours-work-detail-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="622" alt="Ceed’s invoice view for a demo account: a Draft, Generated, Submitted, Paid, Settled pipeline, net to invoice $16,000, one line for Tomás Aguilar at Tier 1, and a work detail of six dated entries totalling 40 hours, with the note that every approved entry is evidence under the charges, never a pricing input, and that the month is waiting on one open log."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The same idea in the product. An invoice on Ceed’s staging environment for a demo account, September 2026: the math, then the work detail underneath it, six approved entries and forty hours, with the held hour left off. The month cannot bill until the person who logged the hours has marked their month complete.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Third, the invoice carries no news. Every hour on it was either inside the budget or approved by name before it was billed, so the client has already seen the number that would have started the counting. The dispute that adds three weeks does not begin.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/late-paying-clients/month-close-readiness-open-items-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="302" alt="Ceed’s month close readiness panel for a demo firm: three open items, each closing as a recorded decision. Approvals queue, one open, held hours and requests freeze as is. Cap positions, every account within cap. A delivery score rule, one account with no score. Invoices, all final. Receivables, nothing overdue. Next month’s book, nothing booked."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The close, before it happens. Ceed’s readiness panel on staging, September 2026: the held hour is an open item, and receivables sit next to invoices on the same list. Open items never block the close. Closing records each one as a decision with a name on it.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;What Ceed does not do, yet, is chase the client. Payment terms live in the agreement and on the invoice, and the invoice is yours to send and to follow up. Collection and the sync to accounting tools are planned, and marked as such on the &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;comparison page&lt;/a&gt;, which is dated. The client’s clock is still the client’s. The firm’s clock, the part of the wait that was always yours, gets shorter by the length of a close and the length of an argument.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Margin per client is visible to the owners the morning after the close, and the contractor’s payout statement comes from the same hours the invoice used. So when a client is late, she knows exactly what that client is carrying, and exactly what she is carrying for them. That is where a fractional CFO practice, a security boutique or an agency starts the conversation about terms, with the hours in hand. The pricing side of that conversation is &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;The rate was set on day one. The client grew.&lt;/a&gt; and the agreement side is &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"&gt;The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-show"&gt;Three conversations with people who run firms.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 102 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are with people who have had to pay a team out of a receivables ledger.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;14&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/14-biff-clark-cybersecurity-specialist-and-owner-of-coefficient-of/"&gt;Biff Clark, owner of Coefficient Technologies&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;March 2022 · Fifteen years of running a small security consultancy, clients and invoices included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;83&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/83-how-small-companies-can-make-their-security-doable/"&gt;Phil Howie, founder and CEO of Sidekick&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;December 2025 · How small companies build a security practice before they can afford a team, which is the client on the other side of the invoice.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;102&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/102-ciso-does-not-spell-ceo/"&gt;Chris Kirschke, founder of Kyberis AI&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2026 · Twenty-seven years in security operations, then a company to run, with revenue and customers that were suddenly his problem.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If your invoices go out on the fifth and come back in sixty days, sign up and see the product with your own numbers. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How late are small business invoices paid on average?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;In the United States, 9.0 days late on average in the March 2026 quarter, with firms waiting 28.8 days in total to be paid, according to Xero’s Small Business Insights, published 30 April 2026. Both figures were up on the previous quarter. Among agencies, 71% report that at least one in four invoices is paid late (Ignition, May 2025, 273 respondents).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Should a consultant stop work when a client does not pay?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Practitioners in r/msp and r/freelance agree on the order: follow the contract, tell the client in writing that work stops on a stated date if the balance is not settled, and let the owner make that call rather than the technician. The stronger position is to have the stop loss, the most unpaid work a client may hold at once, written into the agreement before the work starts. Ceed applies a budget in hours to each client and holds the hour that would cross it, so the limit is enforced at the hour rather than remembered at the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How do I get clients to pay invoices on time?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Shorten both clocks. On the client’s side: shorter terms or payment on delivery, a deposit before work starts, a premium for longer terms, and weekly rather than monthly billing for clients who stretch. On the firm’s side: send the invoice the day the month closes rather than a week later, and make sure nothing on it is news to the client. An invoice computed from the agreement, with every over-budget hour approved before it was billed, removes the surprise that starts most disputes.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Is there a law against paying invoices late?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;In the United Kingdom, from 2026, yes for large firms paying smaller suppliers: the Commercial Payments Bill introduced on 19 May 2026 caps payment terms at 60 days, sets interest at 8% above the Bank of England base rate and lets the Small Business Commissioner fine persistent late payers. In the United States the federal Prompt Payment Act covers government agencies and most state prompt-payment laws cover construction, so for commercial services work the enforceable terms are the ones in the agreement and on the invoice, plus whatever late fee or interest the agreement names.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>

  <entry>
    <title>Held. Not hidden.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden</id>
    <published>2026-08-04T09:00:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>When an hour crosses a client’s budget, software can tell you later, refuse the hour, or hold it for a decision. Only one of those keeps both the hour and the decision in the record.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;Forty hours bought. Forty logged by the eighteenth. On the nineteenth, someone on the team does two more hours of good work for the client and logs them. What happens next is the whole design question of a system that runs a firm’s money, and there are only three answers.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="an-alert-is-a-report"&gt;An alert is a report.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The first answer is to tell you. Most time trackers do this: the budget passes a threshold and an email goes out, within the hour on some, the next morning on others. It is useful. It is also history. By the time you read it the hours are in the month, the work is delivered, and the choice about who pays for it has been made by default. An alert changes what you know. It does not change what happened.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people who build these tools know it. The budget email is a project feature, built to keep a project near its estimate. It was never built to hold a rule at the moment the rule is tested.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ron Baker, who has argued since the 1990s that professional firms should abolish the timesheet, said the sharpest version on The Soul of Enterprise in 2016: “By definition, once you see something on a timesheet, it can no longer be managed.” We keep the timesheet and we take the point. A report about last week is a history lesson. Baker made the longer case to an accounting audience in 2011, in eight minutes.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B7B4vTalN5I"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Ron Baker on Black Swans, Trashing Timesheets and Value Pricing. Tom Hood, 8 min, published 25 January 2011. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B7B4vTalN5I"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The alert has a second cost. IDC’s February 2026 survey of 100 professional services firms for Kantata found a “3% delay in invoices being issued” at firms running on reports rather than records. The hour that is found late is billed late, if it is billed at all.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="a-refused-hour-disappears"&gt;A refused hour disappears.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The second answer is to refuse the hour. Some trackers and suites can do this: at the budget, the timer stops or the entry is rejected with a message to contact the budget owner. It sounds like discipline. In practice it is the oldest failure in professional services with a new interface. An engineer described the older version on Hacker News in 2010. Told he was over budget at 54 hours on a 50-hour estimate, he “was not to charge any more time to that ticket. This essentially means ‘work for free.’”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The work still happens. The client still needed it. The record now says it did not happen, and the hour is eaten before anyone with authority has looked at it. Thomas Ptacek, who co-founded two security consultancies, put it plainly in 2024: “Serious consultancies routinely eat billable weeks of time in order to meet client success criteria and retain relationships.” David C. Baker has said for years that the average creative firm captures about 42% of its time rather than the 60% it should. A refusal makes that gap policy.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people inside the refusal describe it in detail, and the threads about it are among the most upvoted in their fields. In November 2021 a first-year accountant wrote in r/Accounting that timesheets were the worst part of the job, “worrying about getting my hours up without going over budget on what I’m assigned on.” The thread reached 1,578 points and 171 comments. The reply with 851 points described a firm that sold itself as having no timesheets and then wanted an email to the partner every evening listing the day’s work. The reply with 103 gave the honest version of the rule: “If you spend 6 hours on something, put 6 hours on your timesheet even if the project budget you’ve been given is 2 hours,” followed by the admission that nobody had ever been spoken to for going over budget, only for logging too few billable hours. Another, at 369 points, said the trick was several hours of unpaid overtime a day so the numbers look right.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Four months earlier a thread titled “Everything they said about billable hours is true” had reached 1,109 points with the same shape: bill less than the schedule and the client is upset, bill more and the client is upset. “By far one of the worst thing in PA is charging times and the sweating over the budget,” wrote one reply at 255 points. Another, at 115, described managers who hand out ninety hours of work a week and want a meeting if anyone charges more than fifty-five. Every one of those firms had a budget and a wall. None of them had a decision.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Blair Enns, who has spent his career telling creative firms to stop selling hours, has the three-word version.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Timesheets. Are. Lies.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Do with this what you will, but don’t lie to yourself about the implications of this Truth.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@blairenns, Blair Enns&lt;/b&gt; · 4 June 2019 · 49 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/blairenns/status/1135984785879212032"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;They are lies when the wall makes them lies. A record that stops at the budget is a record of the budget, not of the work. Jonathan Stark’s ten minutes on why nobody can buy an hour is the cleanest statement of what the client actually purchased, and it is not the entry the timer refused.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QGOdlFgQSWg"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;You Can’t Buy An Hour. Jonathan Stark, 11 min, published 10 February 2022. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QGOdlFgQSWg"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;It also teaches the team the wrong lesson. Buddy Punch’s 2025 survey of 534 US workers found 30% feel time tracking is surveillance and 47% want access to their own records. A wall at the budget says the system is there to police them. The truth is the other way around. Every hour your team works counts. The only question is who pays for it, and that question belongs to the firm, not to the person who did the work at eleven at night.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="a-held-hour-waits"&gt;A held hour waits.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The third answer is the one Ceed gives. The hour that would push a client over budget is saved, marked, and held. It waits for a named person, the account leader or an owner, to say yes or no. Nothing is billed quietly. Nothing disappears.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ol class="steps"&gt;&lt;li class="step"&gt;&lt;span class="tag"&gt;Logged&lt;/span&gt;&lt;p&gt;2.0 h · Harbor &amp;amp; Vine · Revisions, round 3&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li class="step"&gt;&lt;span class="tag tag-held"&gt;Held&lt;/span&gt;&lt;p&gt;Over the 40 h budget. Waiting for Dana.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li class="step"&gt;&lt;span class="tag tag-ok"&gt;Approved&lt;/span&gt;&lt;p&gt;On the March invoice, at $150 an hour.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;p&gt;Approved, the hour lands on that month’s invoice at the rate in the agreement. Declined, it stays on the record and off the invoice, and the firm knows exactly what it chose to give away, when, and to whom. Both answers are true. Both are in the record. The budget held either way, because the rule was enforced at entry and not read about the morning after.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/today-two-hours-held-approve-with-a-reason-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="480" alt="Ceed’s Today page for a demo account: two hours held on Acme Co, logged by Tomás Aguilar, over the booked hours. The card explains that approving raises the allocation and declining keeps the hours on record and off the invoice, shows one entry and two hours held, a typed reason that reads Their CFO asked for it on Thursday’s call, bill it at the agreement rate, and two buttons, Decline and Approve."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The hold, in the product. Ceed’s Today page on the staging environment, September 2026, with a demo account: two hours past the booked hours, held for approval, the reason typed and kept with the approver’s name. Two verbs, and no third.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/activity-append-only-held-to-approved-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="372" alt="Ceed’s Activity page, headed Every change, forever, append-only: actor, action, before and after. Two rows for Acme Co by Jon: a time entry changed from 42 booked hours and held to 44 and approved, and a time entry added with its description, hours and status."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Both answers are in the record. Ceed’s Activity page on staging, September 2026: every change, forever, with the actor, the action, and the value before and after. The top row is the held hour becoming approved and the booked hours moving from 42 to 44. A decline would sit in the same list.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;There is a quieter benefit. The system takes the question, so the account lead does not have to. Over-servicing is mostly people-pleasing at the account level, a yes said to be liked. A hold turns that yes into a decision made by the person whose margin it is, on the record, with the hours in front of them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="what-the-person-logging-sees"&gt;What the person logging sees.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;One message a day. No timers, no screenshots, no wall.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="The daily Slack reminder"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Slack&lt;/b&gt; · direct message&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Today, 9:00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="msg"&gt;&lt;span class="msg-from"&gt;Ceed&lt;/span&gt;Hours left this month.&lt;br&gt;Harbor &amp;amp; Vine · 0 h&lt;br&gt;Northline Health · 12.5 h&lt;br&gt;Copperfield Tools · 31.0 h&lt;br&gt;Log yesterday’s hours.&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hold is framed as the client’s budget in question, never as the person’s hour. Everyone sees their own hours. The person who logged the two hours on the nineteenth knows at once that they are held, and knows by that afternoon whether the client is paying for them. Nothing they did is lost.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/held-not-hidden/time-tracking-log-slack-reminder-month-complete-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="479" alt="Ceed’s Time tracking page: You’ve logged 0.0 h today, your pay is $0. A form with Logging for, Partner, Date, Start, End, Duration and Description, a Log it button, scope buttons for Today, Month and Year, a note reading Done logging the month? Accounts you worked can invoice only after everyone on them says so, with a button My month is complete, and a line reading If you’re allocated on a partner this month, Slack reminds you when today is still empty."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;What the person logging sees. Ceed’s Time tracking page on staging, September 2026: one form, no timer, their own pay for the day, and two sentences that matter. The month cannot invoice until everyone who worked on the account says their month is complete, and Slack reminds them only when today is still empty.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The threads on the other side of the timesheet are about walls and screenshots, not about hours. In August 2025 an engineer told r/ExperiencedDevs about a profitable startup that suddenly required everyone to log everything, then announced a loss three months later, a thread that reached 800 points and 179 comments. Two of the replies are the two designs in this post. One, at 127 points: “I work for a consultancy, here we track time to invoice our customers.” Another, at 54: “Honestly, this is better for the engineer. Lost 2 hours in a meeting? It now shows.” When the hour is counted for the client’s budget and the person’s own record, it protects the person. When it is counted to watch them, it does the other thing.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In May 2026 someone at a managed services provider asked r/sysadmin about tracking non-billable time in five-minute increments, 195 points and 157 comments. The top reply, at 287: “Make sure to add at least 30 minutes a day on the time sheet card for time spent updating time sheets.” Another, at 153: “all this leads to is employees padding their time.” The same month, one salaried remote worker’s answer to a new timesheet policy was liked 39,000 times.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;I’m a salaried employee. But, I work remotely. My job asked us can we start using timesheets to monitor our time. Cause people don’t be working frfr. So I submitted my timesheet and it had 68 hours for one work week. I sent it to my manager and asked could I be paid overtime.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@Hearts0faKing&lt;/b&gt; · 12 May 2026 · 39,120 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/Hearts0faKing/status/2054248180808577296"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Sixty-eight hours is the record the manager did not want. It is also true, and the only design that survives contact with a true record is one in which the hours are the person’s and the decision is the firm’s. Basecamp drew that line in its own terms of service in 2020, when it barred third parties from using its interface for anything that “remotely records, monitors, or reports” a user’s activity, with one exception.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;New Basecamp policy: “Third parties may not access and employ the API if the functionality is part of an application that remotely records, monitors, or reports a Service user’s activity other than time tracking, both inside and outside the applications”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@dhh, David Heinemeier Hansson&lt;/b&gt; · 4 May 2020 · 391 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/dhh/status/1257380983265005570"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="monitoring-is-the-other-design"&gt;Monitoring is the other design.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hold is sometimes mistaken for surveillance, so it is worth saying what surveillance is. In August 2022 The New York Times reported that eight of the ten largest private employers in the United States track the productivity of individual workers, many in real time, where a pause can cost pay and, at one large insurer, low keyboard activity can cut a bonus. Jodi Kantor, who reported it with Arya Sundaram, explained it on CBS the next morning and on The Daily ten days later.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4n8XbiXSDe0"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;New York Times’ Jodi Kantor on the rise of employee surveillance. CBS Mornings, 5 min, published 15 August 2022, 24,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4n8XbiXSDe0"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The American Psychological Association measured what that does to the people being watched. In its 2023 Work in America survey of 2,515 employed adults, 51% knew their employer monitored them. Of those, 56% said they typically felt tense or stressed at work, against 40% of the unmonitored, and 28% said they had experienced harm to their mental health at work, against 16%. Tara Behrend of Michigan State University, then president of the Society for Industrial and Organizational Psychology, said the data showed the tools do not make people work better: “They are counterproductive for the organizations that use them.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/held-not-hidden/monitored-workers-vs-not-apa-work-in-america-2023-nyt-2022.svg" width="640" height="470" alt="Paired bars from the American Psychological Association 2023 Work in America survey: monitored workers against those not monitored. Feel tense or stressed at work, 56 against 40 percent. Say the workplace hurts their mental health, 45 against 29 percent. Have experienced harm to it at work, 28 against 16 percent. Above the bars: 51 percent of US workers know their employer monitors them, and eight of the ten largest private US employers track individual productivity, The New York Times, 2022."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Watched people work worse, and say so. Sources: American Psychological Association, 2023 Work in America survey, Harris Poll, 2,515 employed adults, April 2023. Jodi Kantor and Arya Sundaram, The New York Times, 14 August 2022.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Cory Doctorow, reading the same Times story, named the mechanism in a thread that August.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;This is yet more proof that “you treasure what you measure,” or, more formally, “any target becomes a measurement” (AKA #GoodhartsLaw).&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The decline of worker productivity in pursuit of metrics is an inescapable failure mode of bossware.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@doctorow, Cory Doctorow&lt;/b&gt; · 21 August 2022 · 221 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/doctorow/status/1561417509273731073"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Bloomberg had filmed the industry two years earlier, twelve minutes on the software that watches while you work, and CBS returned to it in 2025 with the numbers larger. A hold measures none of that. It does not know when the person was at the keyboard, what they typed or whether they were idle. It knows one thing: that an hour, logged by the person who worked it, would take a client past the budget the client bought, and that someone with authority should say yes or no before the invoice does.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rLjZ6mbodcE"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How Bossware is Watching While You Work. Bloomberg Originals, 12 min, published 11 December 2020, 142,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rLjZ6mbodcE"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-FBmHm30vUo"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Your boss may be using surveillance software to monitor you. CBS News, 4 min, published 26 February 2025. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-FBmHm30vUo"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="closed-means-closed"&gt;Closed means closed.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The last thing a hold gives you is a month you can close. Every hour was either within budget, approved past it, or declined past it, by a named person, on a dated record. When the month closes, the invoices, the statements and the margin are frozen and nothing in them changes after. That is a record a buyer, a lender or your own bookkeeper can read without asking what really happened, because what really happened is what it says.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Six books on trust, rules and records, none of them about time tracking, all of them about why a hold works and a wall does not.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1416549005"&gt;The Speed of Trust&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Stephen M. R. Covey, 2006. Trust as an economic quantity, and why a firm that checks everything moves slower than one that checks the right thing once.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1594484805"&gt;Drive&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Daniel H. Pink, 2009. Autonomy, mastery and purpose, and what happens to all three when people are watched.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0062874780"&gt;It Doesn’t Have to Be Crazy at Work&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jason Fried and David Heinemeier Hansson, 2018. The Basecamp position on time, attention and not watching people, from the people who wrote the policy quoted above.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/014313700X"&gt;Nudge&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Richard H. Thaler and Cass R. Sunstein, final edition 2021. Choice architecture, which is what a hold is: the default keeps the hour, and the decision is made by the person whose margin it is.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0312430000"&gt;The Checklist Manifesto&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Atul Gawande, 2009. Why a rule enforced at the moment it applies beats a rule everyone knows and nobody checks.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0525536221"&gt;Measure What Matters&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;John Doerr, 2018. What to measure and what not to, from the man who brought objectives and key results to Google. A held hour is a measure. A screenshot is not.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 100 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are about walls, signals and who owns a decision.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;95&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/95-stop-saying-no-how-security-leaders-enable-ai-instead-of-it/"&gt;Pranava Adduri and George Gerchow of Bedrock Data&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;May 2026 · Stop saying no. Security leaders who put in guardrails instead of walls, which is the hold in another trade.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;84&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/84-what-gets-missed-when-nobody-reviews-the-code/"&gt;Jack Cable, co-founder and CEO of Corridor&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;December 2025 · What gets missed when nobody reviews the code, and why a signal beats a wall of alerts. The hour has the same problem.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;91&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/91-why-asking-developers-to-fix-everything-is-a-bad-idea/"&gt;Neatsun Ziv on why asking developers to fix everything is a bad idea&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;March 2026 · Who should own a decision, and what happens when it lands on the person nearest the keyboard instead.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two other shows have the long version. &lt;a href="https://www.thesoulofenterprise.com/tsoe/timesheets"&gt;The Soul of Enterprise&lt;/a&gt; spent its 109th episode, in 2016, on trashing the timesheet. &lt;a href="https://www.nytimes.com/2022/08/24/podcasts/the-daily/workplace-surveillance-productivity-tracking.html"&gt;The Daily&lt;/a&gt; spent 24 August 2022 on the rise of workplace surveillance, with Jodi Kantor. Listen to both and the hold sits exactly between them: a record without a wall, a rule without a watcher.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Where the time trackers, the suites and the agreement-billing tools stand on this, row by row and dated, is on the &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;comparison page&lt;/a&gt;. It credits them where they are ahead, which is real, and it names the one thing that happens here and nowhere else. The month that made us build it, with the numbers behind it, is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"&gt;The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.&lt;/a&gt; The held hour as the stop loss against late payment is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/late-paying-clients"&gt;The client paid late. The invoice was later.&lt;/a&gt;, and as the change order at the hour in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"&gt;The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is the difference between a budget alert and a held hour?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Timing and authority. A budget alert is sent after the hours are in the month, usually by email, to whoever is subscribed, and changes nothing about the record. A held hour is stopped at the moment it is logged, before it reaches the invoice, and waits for a named person, the account leader or an owner, to approve or decline it. The alert reports. The hold decides, and keeps the hour either way.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Is holding an hour a form of employee monitoring?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;No. Monitoring software records activity: keystrokes, screenshots, idle time, location. A hold records one fact the person entered themselves, that an hour of work would take a client past the budget the client bought, and routes the decision to the person whose margin it is. The person who logged the hour sees their own hours and the outcome the same day. Nothing about how they worked is captured, and nothing they logged is lost.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Who decides on a held hour?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The account leader for that client or an owner of the firm, by name. The decision is recorded with the reason and the time, and both are frozen when the month closes. The person who logged the hour does not decide, which is the point: over-servicing is usually a yes said at the account level to be liked, and the hold moves that yes to the person who pays for it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What happens to a declined hour?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;It stays on the record and off the invoice. The firm sees exactly what it chose to give away, when, to which client and on whose decision. The client’s budget holds, and the invoice matches the agreement.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>

  <entry>
    <title>They see the fee. You see the hours.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee</id>
    <published>2026-07-21T09:00:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>A flat retainer is a fixed fee sized in hours only the owner knows. What happens to the margin when nobody watches that number, and what changes when the hour past it waits for a decision.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;The advice in the fractional world is consistent. Do not sell hours. Sell the outcome, price the value, put a monthly fee on the agreement and stop thinking about time. It is good advice, and the people who give it size their retainers in hours anyway.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The “gold standard for a fractional executive,” in Taylor Crane’s words at Fractional Jobs this February, “is a retainer for $10,000 per month for approximately 10 hours per week of work.” The Fractional Work Report 2026, with 1,733 respondents, found 46% of fractional executives bill primarily on a monthly retainer. In accounting, CPA.com’s 2024 benchmark of 206 client advisory practices found 57% bill a fixed fee with regular out-of-scope monitoring and another 27% a fixed fee with minimal monitoring. The fee is flat. Behind it, always, is a number of hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee/the-private-budget-by-the-numbers-fractional-jobs-cpa-ignition-idc-2022-2026.svg" width="640" height="410" alt="Six tiles. 46 percent of fractional executives bill mainly on a monthly retainer, Fractional Work Report 2026, 1,733 respondents. 84 percent of client advisory practices bill a fixed fee, CPA.com 2024 benchmark, 206 practices. 57 percent of agencies lose 1,000 to 5,000 dollars a month to unbilled work, Ignition, May 2025. 88 percent of accounting firms put off the out-of-scope conversation and 43 percent absorbed the work, Ignition, August 2022, 506 firms. 5 percent margin leakage from unmanaged scope, IDC for Kantata, February 2026."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The fee is flat. The budget is private. The 84% of client advisory practices on a fixed fee split into 57% that watch scope regularly and 27% that barely do. Sources: Fractional Jobs, 2026. CPA.com and AICPA, December 2024. Ignition, May 2025 and August 2022. IDC for Kantata, February 2026.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The pressure to sell the fee rather than the hour is real and it is growing. In March 2025 Greg Isenberg asked whether $750-an-hour law firms would survive a tool that drafted his contract in fifteen minutes, and 18,000 people liked the question.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Are we going to pretend $750/hour law firms are going to be business as usual in the AI age?&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;I just used Grok Deep Research to draft a simple contract. Took 15 minutes. Would have cost $2,000 with a lawyer.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When I sent it to my attorney to review, his response was “looks good”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@gregisenberg, Greg Isenberg&lt;/b&gt; · 25 March 2025 · 18,672 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/gregisenberg/status/1904632504667300165"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Taylor Crane has made the case for the retainer at length on other people’s shows. In January 2026 he spent half an hour with WRKdefined on how fractional work is bought and sold, including the arithmetic behind the monthly fee.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q6Fn0siOO9A"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Ep. 211: Taylor Crane, founder of Fractional Jobs. WRKdefined, 37 min, published 30 January 2026. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=q6Fn0siOO9A"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-number-only-you-know"&gt;The number only you know.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;That number is the private budget. The client bought a fee and a result. You priced the fee by asking how many hours it should take and multiplying by what your time is worth, and then you did the decent thing and never mentioned the hours again. Which is fine, until the hours change and the fee does not.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A client budget, within the month"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Harbor &amp;amp; Vine&lt;/b&gt; · March&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-ok"&gt;Within budget&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="fig"&gt;&lt;b&gt;40.0&lt;/b&gt; &lt;span&gt;of 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="meter" data-m="100"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="status status-ok"&gt;Within budget. The client sees $6,000. You see forty hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Crane names the cost in the same breath as the standard: “There’s a natural incentive for scope creep, which means you’re working for less than you expected.” That sentence is the whole problem. The fee is a promise to the client. The hours are a promise to yourself, and nobody is holding you to it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Jonathan Stark, who has spent a decade telling consultants to stop billing by the hour, described the client’s side of the fee in April 2026, after buying a website for a flat $2,800 that took the agency perhaps ten hours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;I paid $2,800 flat fee for a new website.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Would I be happier if it took longer? No.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;In fact, I would’ve paid more for them to finish it in a day instead of a week.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@jonathanstark, Jonathan Stark&lt;/b&gt; · 6 April 2026 · 9 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/jonathanstark/status/2041162767525105877"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The client sees the fee and is glad of it. The agency saw ten hours against a budget it wrote when it quoted, and whether it made money on the job depended on that budget, not on the fee. Stark’s 2019 video on retainers puts the harder question in its title: do you trust your clients?&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qS2L3dNcnDQ"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Consulting Retainers: Do You Trust Your Clients? Jonathan Stark, 8 min, published 31 January 2019, 4,200 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qS2L3dNcnDQ"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ron Baker and Ed Kless said on The Soul of Enterprise in 2018 what the subscription firms are actually selling: “We’re not pricing a service, we’re pricing an outcome and insurance (peace of mind).” Insurance is a good word for it. An insurer that does not count its claims is not brave. It is briefly profitable.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="what-it-costs-to-look-away"&gt;What it costs to look away.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The numbers are not small. In Ignition’s May 2025 survey of 273 agency managers and executives, 57% said they lose between $1,000 and $5,000 every month to unbilled work, and 78% said they rarely or only sometimes charge for out-of-scope work. Arron Bennett, who runs a finance practice for agencies, put the mechanism in one line this June: “The extra hours get logged under the client, the retainer fee stays fixed, and the effective hourly rate on the account drops month by month.” His worked example is a $15,000 retainer consuming 240 hours at a $75 loaded cost, which is $18,000 of delivery on a $15,000 fee. The account looks profitable in the pipeline and loses $3,000 a month.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Dillon Towey, who runs operations at a nineteen-person accounting firm, told Ignition how it feels from inside: “We’d charge a client $600 a month on the assumption that we would spend no more than six hours taking care of their accounting needs. For a long time, even when we could see it was taking eight, 10, or 12 hours to take care of their needs, we’d just take it in the shorts.” Ignition’s 2022 survey of 506 US firms found 88% had delayed or avoided the conversation about it, and 43% absorbed the work.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The threads say the same thing in the first person. In December 2025 a web designer asked r/Entrepreneur how to tell a client the project was finished when the quick requests kept arriving after the final invoice, eight emails in three weeks. The thread reached 223 points. The reply with 80 points reframed it: “How does a grocery store treat you if you keep coming back in for additional items? They smile and happily ring you up and charge you for your items.” The reply with 66 turned it into the retainer: “Work a maintenance retainer into future contracts so you can continue to get paid.” Both are right, and together they are how the private budget is born. The retainer that answers scope creep is sized in hours, and then the hours creep.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;IDC put a number on the creep in February 2026, from a survey of 100 professional services firms for Kantata: a “5% margin leakage from unmanaged scope due to poor variation tracking.” Five points of margin is the difference between a practice that pays its owner and one that pays its clients.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Notice what every one of those firms had. They had the private number. They knew six hours was the budget. What they did not have was the moment: a point at which the seventh hour was a question to be answered rather than a fact to be discovered.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="watched-at-the-hour"&gt;Watched at the hour. Not at the invoice.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;That moment is what Ceed adds, and it is the only thing it adds to the retainer. You keep the fee flat. You keep the hours to yourself. You write the hours behind each retainer into the client’s agreement, and Ceed counts every hour the team logs against it. The hour that would cross the budget is held, marked, and put in front of you for a yes or a no, the moment it is logged.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A held hour, waiting for a decision"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Harbor &amp;amp; Vine&lt;/b&gt; · March&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip"&gt;Held&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="fig"&gt;&lt;b&gt;42.0&lt;/b&gt; &lt;span&gt;of 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="meter" data-m="95.2"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="entry"&gt;Thu 19 Mar · 2.0 h · Landing page revisions, round 3 · Priya K.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class="status"&gt;Held for approval. 2.0 h over the client’s budget.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="verbs"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approve&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;Decline&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Approve it, and the extra goes on the invoice at the rate in the agreement. Decline it, and it stays on the record and off the invoice, so you know exactly what you chose to give and to whom. Either way the month is not a surprise, the seventh hour was a decision, and by the third held hour you are having the conversation 88% of firms postpone, with the hours in hand and the fee not yet broken.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee/partner-cap-booked-leader-service-progress-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="702" alt="A client page on Ceed for a demo account, Acme Co: customer since September 2026, Slack channels, cap plus excess $26,200, booked $17,600, a delivery score missing for the month, leader Sasha, closer Jon, status active, type customer, and the service card On-demand security team, active and staffed, with a progress bar reading $17.6k completed of $26,200 a month."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The private budget as a number the firm can see. A client page on Ceed’s staging environment, September 2026, demo account: the cash cap and the excess above it, what is booked against it this month, the account leader, and the retainer’s progress bar with the cap marked on it. The client sees none of this.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The month reads as a burn. Cash billings against the cap. Hours delivered against hours booked. Both are live, and both come from the same entries the invoice will use.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee/partner-economics-burn-cash-vs-cap-delivered-vs-booked-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="912" alt="Ceed’s client economics view for September 2026: a bar for cash billings against cap plus excess reading $17.6k of $26.2k, with a thin marker for the booked amount and a thick one for the cap, and a bar for delivered against booked reading $17.6k delivered of $17.6k booked, live from time tracking."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The month as a burn. Ceed’s client economics view on staging, September 2026: cash billings against the cap plus excess, with the booked amount as a thin marker and the cap as a thick one, and hours delivered against hours booked, live from time tracking.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;A fractional CFO who runs his practice this way explained in 2023 how he keeps the hours out of the client conversation entirely, which is the point. The hours are for the firm. Charles Leikauf’s seventeen minutes on what a fractional CFO can charge is the fuller version of the same arithmetic.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xDcYuosv0Eg"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How I Avoid Hourly Pricing Discussions (Fractional CFO). The CFO Report, 4 min, published 11 April 2023. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=xDcYuosv0Eg"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s0LMxS76M6I"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How Much Can I Charge As A Fractional CFO? Charles Leikauf, 17 min, published 27 May 2024, 9,100 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=s0LMxS76M6I"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-invoice-still-says-one-line"&gt;The invoice still says one line.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;None of this reaches the client unless you want it to. A flat retainer invoices as a flat retainer. The hours behind it, and the budget you sized it with, stay yours.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="An invoice computed from the agreement"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Invoice&lt;/b&gt; · Harbor &amp;amp; Vine · March 2026&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Computed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Monthly retainer · 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$6,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$6,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;Computed from the agreement dated 2 Feb 2026. Nothing typed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;The 2.0 h declined on 19 Mar stay on the record and off this invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Chris Do’s advice to designers on the same subject, never justify the price, has been watched more than a million times. The retainer client bought a result, and the one-line invoice is the result’s price. The hours behind it were never the client’s business, and with a record at the hour they no longer have to be the owner’s worry either.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Abi8kwkfZbA"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Don’t Justify Your Prices. Do This Instead. Chris Do, The Futur, 9 min, published 19 October 2023, 1.2 million views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Abi8kwkfZbA"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The longest argument for the flat fee is Ron Baker’s. He spent seventy minutes with Jonathan Stark in 2023 on the subscription model for professional firms, the book he wrote about it with Paul Dunn, and why the hour should go. He is right about the price. The firms in this post show what happens to the hours after the price is right.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5DKtt8YEUzE"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Ron Baker, Time’s Up With Jonathan Stark, 1 h 14 min, published 18 July 2023. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5DKtt8YEUzE"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Eight books on the fee, the retainer and the subscription. Every one of them assumes the owner knows the hours behind the price.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119893526"&gt;Time’s Up&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Paul Dunn and Ronald J. Baker, 2022. The subscription business model for professional firms, from the man who has argued against the hour since the 1990s.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/159184746X"&gt;The Automatic Customer&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;John Warrillow, 2015. Nine subscription models and what each does to a firm’s value, including the ones a consultancy can actually run.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0525536469"&gt;Subscribed&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Tien Tzuo with Gabe Weisert, 2018. Why the subscription economy happened, from the founder of Zuora, and what it asks of the seller every month.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1119776929"&gt;Value-Based Fees&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Alan Weiss, third edition, 2021. Fees on outcomes rather than time, and the retainer chapter every fractional executive should read before quoting one.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1264264917"&gt;Million Dollar Consulting&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Alan Weiss, sixth edition, 2021. The whole practice, from proposal to fee to the client who wants more than the agreement says.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1683501640"&gt;The Irresistible Consultant’s Guide to Winning Clients&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David A. Fields, 2017. How consulting work is actually bought, which is the half of the fee conversation the seller does not see.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0D91GR548"&gt;Hourly Billing Is Nuts&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jonathan Stark. The short, blunt case against the hour. Read it, then count the hours anyway.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B0DCCZL2D7"&gt;The Four Conversations&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Blair Enns, 2024. The conversations that set the price, from the author of the Win Without Pitching Manifesto.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="three-things-this-month"&gt;Three things to do this month.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;ol&gt;&lt;li&gt;Write down the hours behind every retainer you sell. Not the rate you tell clients. The number you priced it with.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Count every hour the team works against that number, by client, as it is logged. Not on Friday. Not at the close.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;Decide the hour past the budget the day it is logged, on the record, with the client’s name on the decision.&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ol&gt;&lt;p&gt;The first is yours. Ceed does the second and the third, for 0.1% of what you invoice, for &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO and accounting practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;fractional executives&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; and the other firms that sell their team’s time. The month that taught us the third, and the moment we built to catch it, is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"&gt;The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.&lt;/a&gt; The pricing side of the private budget, the rate set on day one and never moved, is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;The rate was set on day one. The client grew.&lt;/a&gt;, and what the retainer’s rollover rule and block hours have to do with it is in &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"&gt;The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 99 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them sit on either side of a retainer.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;7&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/7-michael-brooks-vciso-and-director-of-cyber-risk-services-at/"&gt;Michael Brooks, vCISO and Director of Cyber Risk Services at Trava&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2021 · The fractional CISO model from someone who runs it, and what a fraction of a CISO is worth.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;83&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/83-how-small-companies-can-make-their-security-doable/"&gt;Phil Howie, founder and CEO of Sidekick&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;December 2025 · How small companies build a security practice before they can afford a team, which is the client on the other side of the retainer.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;14&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/14-biff-clark-cybersecurity-specialist-and-owner-of-coefficient-of/"&gt;Biff Clark, owner of Coefficient Technologies&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;March 2022 · Fifteen years of running a small security consultancy, clients and invoices included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is the private budget behind a retainer?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The number of hours the owner divided the fee by when pricing it. A $6,000 retainer priced at $150 an hour has a private budget of forty hours. The client sees $6,000 and a result. The firm’s margin on the account depends entirely on whether the team’s hours stay near forty, which is why the budget has to be counted even though the client never hears the number.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Should I tell the client how many hours are behind the fee?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Usually not, and Ceed does not. A flat fee invoices as a flat fee. The hours are the firm’s cost and the firm’s business. What the client should hear about, before the invoice rather than on it, is work outside the agreement, and a held hour gives the account leader that conversation on the day the hour is logged, with the hours in hand.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How do I price a monthly retainer?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Taylor Crane’s benchmark for a fractional executive is about $10,000 a month for roughly ten hours a week. Jonathan Stark and Alan Weiss would price the outcome rather than the hours. Whichever way the number is set, write down the hours you sized it with, because that number is the budget the month will be measured against, and the month does not care how the fee was justified.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What happens when a retainer’s hours run out before the month does?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;On a spreadsheet, nothing, until the invoice. On Ceed, the hour that would cross the budget is held the moment it is logged and put in front of the account leader or an owner with the client’s name on it. Approved, it is billed at the rate in the agreement. Declined, it stays on the record and off the invoice, so the firm knows what it gave away and to whom. Either way the retainer stays flat on the invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>

  <entry>
    <title>The invoice told us last. Why we built Ceed.</title>
    <link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed"/>
    <id>https://ceed.so/blog/why-we-built-ceed</id>
    <published>2026-07-07T09:00:00-07:00</published>
    <updated>2026-09-11T17:30:00-07:00</updated>
    <author><name>Jon McLachlan</name><uri>https://ceed.so/about</uri></author>
    <summary>We ran a security consultancy on a spreadsheet. One month it ran tens of thousands of dollars past the hours a client had bought, and we found out when we wrote the invoice. What over-servicing and unbilled hours look like from inside a firm that sells its team’s time, and what we built to stop it.</summary>
    <content type="html">&lt;p&gt;YSecurity sells its team’s time. Penetration tests, compliance programs, identity rollouts, incident response, billed in fifteen-minute increments against a monthly cap, with no retainers and no minimums. It is a good business with one hard question at the end of every month. Did the hours we worked become the money we earned.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The industry has names for the gap. One time-tracking vendor defines time leakage as “any billable work that goes unrecorded, miscategorized, or never appears on an invoice.” Agencies call it over-servicing. Accountants call it scope creep. Inside the firm it is simpler than any of those. It is an hour somebody worked that nobody decided to give away.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;For years our answer lived in a spreadsheet. Each client had a tab. Each tab had the cap the client had bought, the rate, and the hours the team typed in from memory on Friday afternoon, or the following Tuesday. The rules we had agreed with our clients lived in cells. The cells held if somebody remembered to check them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hours were the weakest cell. A timesheet filled in from memory is a guess, and the research on how bad a guess has been available for a decade. Accelo, which makes software for firms like ours, surveyed more than 500 professionals in the summer of 2014 and found that people who record their time daily are 66% accurate, people who record it weekly are 47% accurate, and people who record it less often than weekly are 35% accurate. Logging daily cut the time lost to memory from 23% to under 5%, and the company put the cost of the weekly habit at about $52,000 per professional, per year. Our team logged on Fridays.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/timesheet-accuracy-daily-66-weekly-47-accelo-2014.svg" width="640" height="400" alt="Bar chart: people who record their time daily are 66 percent accurate, weekly 47 percent, less often than weekly 35 percent. Below, daily logging cuts lost time from 23 percent to under 5 percent, and a firm loses about 52,000 dollars per professional per year to memory when time is recorded weekly. Accelo survey of more than 500 professionals, July to August 2014."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;A timesheet filled in on Friday is half a guess. Source: Accelo (then AffinityLive), Time is Money, a survey of more than 500 professionals fielded July to August 2014.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The people filling in the sheets know it. When a system administrator asked r/sysadmin in June 2023 whether it was normal to account for every hour of a salaried day, a requirement explained to him as being “to show how profitable we are as a company,” the thread reached 503 points and 647 comments. The top reply, at 578 points: “the last task, every day on my timesheet was ‘Filled out timesheet of completed daily tasks’.” Another, at 149, logged one line of eight hours a day that read “Did the needful.” The most upvoted post on the subject in r/consulting, at 342 points, is a picture of a manager saying “Hey team it’s Friday. Don’t forget to submit those timesheets.” Friday is the problem. By Friday, Tuesday is gone.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-month"&gt;The month the cells did not hold.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;One month, nobody did. A client had bought a fixed number of hours. The work was urgent and good and the team did it. Nobody logged the extra as it happened, or everybody did and nobody looked, which comes to the same thing. When the invoice was written, the month was tens of thousands of dollars past what the client had agreed to pay.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/client-budget-crossed-on-the-9th-found-at-the-invoice-on-the-31st.svg" width="640" height="360" alt="Timeline of a consulting firm’s month: hours worked cross the client’s budget on the 9th and the overrun is found on the 31st, when the invoice is written. The 22 days between are shaded as work past the budget that nobody decided."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How a client budget is crossed early and found late. Everything in the shaded stretch was billed by surprise or given away.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;We were not unusual. In Magnetic’s benchmark of 104 agencies, with a median size of twenty people, 68% said they regularly go over project budgets and 57% said they get no warning before it happens. The month we are describing is the normal month, with a bigger number on it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The newer numbers say the same thing at industry scale. In February 2026 IDC surveyed 100 professional services organizations in the United States, Canada and the United Kingdom for a white paper sponsored by Kantata, which sells software to those firms, and concluded that firms which look at that kind of software and never adopt it may be quietly losing 5 to 10% of their potential revenue and productivity each year. The paper names the leaks: “5% margin leakage from unmanaged scope due to poor variation tracking,” “up to 20% of skilled employees’ time lost to administration work,” and a “3% delay in invoices being issued.” The sponsor has a product to sell, and the numbers are still the ones every firm we know recognizes. Ours was the 5%, found on the 31st.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Sometimes the invoice never tells at all. In May 2022 a marketer who runs campaigns for small businesses posted in r/smallbusiness that he had been looking through his payments account and realized he had not invoiced a client since the previous October. Six months of work. The client had noticed nothing and neither had he. The thread is small, 33 points, and it is the purest version of the problem: the only place the hours and the money met was one person’s memory, and the person was busy.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;There are two things a firm can do at that point, and over the years we did both. You can send the invoice and surprise a client who trusted you, then take the call that follows, and the discount that follows the call. Or you can eat the hours, which means paying your people for work nobody will ever pay you for. Neither is a decision. Both are what happens when the decision was never made.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="missed-not-lost"&gt;Missed. Not lost.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We started calling these missed opportunities, because that is what they were. Nobody took the money. We never had the moment in which to keep it.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hour worked at eleven at night and never counted was a missed opportunity to bill it. The budget crossed on the ninth and found on the thirty-first was a missed opportunity to ask the client, while it was still a question, whether they wanted the extra work. The cap that was too small for a year was a missed opportunity to reprice it, because we could never put the hours in front of the client. The partner paid from a sheet we hoped was right was a missed opportunity to pay them from the same numbers the invoice used. The equity we took from a startup as fees, recorded in no book, was a missed opportunity to know what the firm had earned. And the three days of the owner’s month that went into closing the books were a missed opportunity to do anything else with them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Every one of them was a decision we did not know we were making. That was the pain. Not the money, though the money hurt. The firm’s own rules were held by nobody at the one moment they mattered, and reported to us afterwards as history.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;David C. Baker has measured the same gap across thousands of firms. On 2Bobs, the podcast he hosts with Blair Enns, he put it in two numbers: “the average firm in the marketing, digital, advertising space is capturing 42 percent of all the time rather than 60.” Not because the firms are idle. “It’s not because they’re not busy. They’re busy,” he said, and “the difference between capturing 60 and 42 percent is that they are underpricing some things and over-servicing things.” The hours were worked. They were never counted.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/hours-captured-42-percent-vs-60-percent-david-c-baker-2bobs.svg" width="640" height="300" alt="Bar chart: the average creative firm captures 42 percent of the hours it works, against the 60 percent David C. Baker says a well run firm captures. The 18 point gap is labelled under-pricing and over-servicing."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Hours captured by the average creative firm, against what Baker says a well run firm captures. Source: David C. Baker with Blair Enns, 2Bobs, “Transcending Timesheets”, 7 October 2020.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x-mwbljeDoM&amp;amp;t=1221s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Transcending Timesheets. 2Bobs, David C. Baker and Blair Enns, 33 min, first released 7 October 2020. Baker’s four arguments against timekeeping and the one reason he keeps it. The player starts at the passage quoted above, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=x-mwbljeDoM&amp;amp;t=1221s"&gt;20:21 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ron Baker, the accountant who has spent thirty years telling professional firms to throw their timesheets away, said the thing we kept coming back to on his own show in 2016: “By definition, once you see something on a timesheet, it can no longer be managed.” We disagree with him about the timesheet and agree with him completely about the sentence. A record read after the month is history. Ours was a very accurate history of decisions nobody made. In 2010 the ABA Journal filmed him making the longer argument to lawyers, seven minutes on why the hour is the wrong thing to sell.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nVj93eqDAIE"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Escaping the Tyranny of Time. Ron Baker with the ABA Journal, 7 min, published 3 September 2010. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nVj93eqDAIE"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Jonathan Stark, who has built a practice on telling consultants to stop billing by the hour, is more careful about the record than his reputation suggests. In a thread from February 2023 he said why he keeps the door open.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Unlike many of my peers, I’m not categorically opposed to the idea of keeping timesheets.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;Tracking hours is a cost optimization tactic, which can be useful if your costs are out of control. Just remember that you can only increase your profits so far by controlling costs.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@jonathanstark, Jonathan Stark&lt;/b&gt; · 3 February 2023 · 84 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/jonathanstark/status/1621732708962418688"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Our costs were out of control for one month and we did not know it until the 31st. That is the whole case for the record. Not a timesheet read on Friday about Tuesday, but a count made at the hour, by the person who worked it, against the number the client bought, in front of someone with the authority to act before the month is over.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="stop-counting-hours"&gt;The advice was to stop counting hours.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The advice we heard, and the advice most firms like ours hear, is to stop selling time. Price the outcome, put a fee on the agreement, and let the hours go. Jonathan Stark has built a career on it. On The Futur’s livestream, watched 276,000 times, he described the firm he ran before he changed his mind: “I was fighting with clients about estimates that we went over. I was arguing about invoices and time sheets, and I was always whipping the developers to get their hours in by the end of the week so we could invoice on Monday.” We recognized every word.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B1b7QlQILRo&amp;amp;t=165s"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Hourly Billing Is Nuts. Stop Trading Time For Money. The Futur with Jonathan Stark, livestream, 11 September 2018, 1 h 25 min, 276,000 views. The player starts at the passage quoted above, &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=B1b7QlQILRo&amp;amp;t=165s"&gt;2:45 on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;Patrick McKenzie, who writes as patio11 and has told a generation of consultants to charge more, put the case for the price in a post from 2019 that consultants still send each other.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="xq"&gt;&lt;blockquote&gt;&lt;p&gt;Rates exert gravity.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;If you charge more, you’ll spend your time talking to more sophisticated clients, working in better businesses, specializing in projects close to the money. These are compounding advantages.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;If you charge less, similar dynamics apply.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;&lt;b&gt;@patio11, Patrick McKenzie&lt;/b&gt; · 10 February 2019 · 595 likes · &lt;a href="https://x.com/patio11/status/1094425564209909760"&gt;View on X&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;David C. Baker made the same point to The Futur in 2020, nine minutes on getting paid for judgment rather than for hours. We agree with all of it, and it was not the problem we had. Whatever we charged, the hours were still our cost, and the cost was counted last.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HNoLn3rapK4"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Getting Paid To Think. David C. Baker with Chris Do, The Futur, 9 min, published 29 April 2020, 48,000 views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HNoLn3rapK4"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The consultants who take the advice find the same thing. In August 2023 the owner of a technology consultancy told r/consulting he was moving clients and contractors from hours to tiers, “monthly subscriptions that reflect the average value we both agree we provide,” because “hours do not reflect value.” The thread reached 199 points. The top reply, at 135, was one sentence: “This will only work if you do not underestimate the amount of work involved in the services you provide.” The fee is flat and the hours behind it still have to be counted, by somebody, against something.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;We agree with him about the price and disagree about the record. Whether a firm bills by the hour or by the outcome, the hours are its cost, and a cost nobody counts is a decision nobody made. The firms that took the advice sized their fixed fees in hours anyway, then stopped watching the number. That is the subject of &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-client-sees-the-fee"&gt;They see the fee. You see the hours.&lt;/a&gt; This post is about the moment the number is crossed. What the same missing record does to getting paid, to the rate and to the agreement is in three later posts: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/late-paying-clients"&gt;The client paid late. The invoice was later.&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/the-rate-that-never-moved"&gt;The rate was set on day one. The client grew.&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/scope-creep-and-the-agreement"&gt;The agreement said 40 hours. The month said 47.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="alert-refuse-hold"&gt;Alert. Refuse. Hold.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;So we asked what software would have to do to have stopped that month. Not what it would have to show us. What it would have to do.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;When an hour crosses a client’s budget, a system can do one of three things. It can tell you later, in an email the next morning, which is a report, and by then the hour is in the month. It can refuse the hour, which means the work was done and the record now says it was not, and the hour is eaten before anyone decides. Or it can hold the hour: save it, mark it, and put it in front of a named person for a yes or a no, the moment it is logged.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p&gt;The refusal is the industry default, and the people inside it describe it precisely. In July 2025 an accountant posted in r/Accounting under the title “Manager: ‘Never eat hours.’ Also manager: ‘Why did you go over budget?’” They had logged fourteen honest hours against an eight-hour budget and were marked down for inefficiency. The thread reached 920 points. The top reply, at 218: “Welcome to public accounting where the budgets are made up and the hours don’t matter.” Another, at 31: “They want you to eat your hours, they don’t want to know you are eating your hours.” That is a refusal with a human face. The hour is worked, the record says it was not, and the person who did the work carries the difference.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/alert-refuse-hold-what-software-does-when-an-hour-crosses-the-budget.svg" width="640" height="360" alt="Three ways time-tracking software handles an hour over a client budget: a budget alert emailed later with the hour already in the month, a refused time entry missing from the record, and a held hour waiting for approval with the budget intact and both the hour and the decision on the record."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;Three things software can do with the hour that crosses a budget. Only the hold keeps the hour and the decision on the record. Where each tool in the field stands is on the &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/compare"&gt;comparison page&lt;/a&gt;, dated.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="A held hour, waiting for a decision"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Acme Co&lt;/b&gt; · June&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip"&gt;Held&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="fig"&gt;&lt;b&gt;41.5&lt;/b&gt; &lt;span&gt;of 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="meter" data-m="96.4"&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;i&gt;&lt;/i&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="entry"&gt;Tue 9 Jun · 1.5 h · Board deck · Maya R.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;p class="status"&gt;Held for approval. 1.5 h over the client’s budget.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="verbs"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approve&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;Decline&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;We built the third. If an hour would push a client over budget, Ceed holds it for approval the moment it is logged. The hour stays on the record. The budget still holds. The person who logged it knows at once, the account leader decides that day, and the client hears about the extra before the invoice, not on it. &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt; became the rule everything else follows, and that post shows what the person who logged the hour sees.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/today-two-hours-held-approve-with-a-reason-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="480" alt="Ceed’s Today page for a demo account: two hours held on Acme Co, logged by Tomás Aguilar, over the booked hours. The card explains that approving raises the allocation and declining keeps the hours on record and off the invoice, shows one entry and two hours held, a typed reason that reads Their CFO asked for it on Thursday’s call, bill it at the agreement rate, and two buttons, Decline and Approve."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The same moment in the product. Ceed’s Today page on the staging environment, September 2026, with a demo account: two hours past the booked hours, held for approval, the reason typed and kept with the approver’s name, and Approve and Decline as the only two verbs.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="computed-from-the-agreement"&gt;The invoice comes from the agreement.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;The second rule came from the invoice itself. Ours had been typed, from a spreadsheet, by a person who was tired. In Ceed the invoice is computed from the agreement: the retainer, the budget, the rates by role, the discounts, the equity taken as payment. It comes out the same way every time, and it matches what the client signed because it was made from what the client signed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="card" aria-label="An invoice computed from the agreement"&gt;&lt;div class="card-top"&gt;&lt;span&gt;&lt;b&gt;Invoice&lt;/b&gt; · Acme Co · June 2026&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span class="chip chip-mid"&gt;Computed&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="rows"&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Monthly retainer · 40 h&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$8,000.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Approved hours past the budget · 1.5 h at $200.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$300.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="row row-total"&gt;&lt;span&gt;Total&lt;/span&gt;&lt;span&gt;$8,300.00&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p class="card-foot"&gt;Computed from the agreement dated 3 Feb 2026. Nothing typed.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/today-invoice-ready-nothing-billed-until-approved-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="369" alt="Ceed’s Today page with an item reading Acme Co’s invoice is ready, $16,000 invoiceable, nothing is billed until you approve it, and a card headed Invoice ready: approved hours, priced by the waterfall, preparing opens a draft and approving inside the document freezes it, with the document line reading draft or none, nothing issued."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;In the product, the invoice waits for a person. Ceed’s Today page on staging, September 2026, demo account: the approved hours are priced by the agreement and prepared as a draft. Nothing is issued until an owner approves it, and approving inside the document freezes it.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;p&gt;The same entries pay everyone. The contractor’s payout statement and the partner’s commission come from the hours the invoice used, so there is no second sheet to reconcile and no argument on payday. Margin per client is visible this morning, to the owners and whoever they name, and the server enforces who sees what. When a month closes, it closes. The invoices, the statements and the margin are frozen as a record, and nothing in it changes after. The close stopped being a project and became a record.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="figure shot"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/activity-append-only-held-to-approved-ceed-staging.png" width="1280" height="372" alt="Ceed’s Activity page, headed Every change, forever, append-only: actor, action, before and after. Two rows for Acme Co by Jon: a time entry changed from 42 booked hours and held to 44 and approved, and a time entry added with its description, hours and status."&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;The record itself. Ceed’s Activity page on staging, September 2026: every change, forever, with the actor, the action, and the value before and after. The top row is a held hour becoming approved, with the booked hours moving from 42 to 44.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="pricing"&gt;0.1%. That is the pricing page.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;We priced Ceed the way we wished our own tools had been priced. 0.1% of what a firm invoices. No seats, so adding a contractor for a month costs nothing. No tiers, so the hold is not a feature on a higher plan. No minimum, so a month you invoice nothing costs nothing. Invoice $200,000 and pay $200. The rate never moves, so the renewal email never arrives.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="our-books-first"&gt;Our books first.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is the record YSecurity runs on today. Every hour our team logs, every client’s cap, every invoice, every payout statement and every close goes through it, and the rule that would have saved us that month holds itself now, at the hour, without anyone remembering to check.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;div class="founders"&gt;&lt;div class="founder"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/jon-mclachlan-co-founder-ceed-ysecurity-160.jpg" width="160" height="160" alt="Jon McLachlan, co-founder of Ceed and YSecurity"&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;b&gt;Jon McLachlan&lt;/b&gt;&lt;span&gt;Co-founder. Started in security at Apple. Led teams at Pure Storage, UnifyID and Robinhood.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;div class="founder"&gt;&lt;img src="https://ceed.so/assets/blog/why-we-built-ceed/sasha-sinkevich-co-founder-ceed-ysecurity-160.jpg" width="160" height="160" alt="Sasha Sinkevich, co-founder of Ceed and YSecurity"&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;b&gt;Sasha Sinkevich&lt;/b&gt;&lt;span&gt;Co-founder. Built security from the ground up at Robinhood, Yugabyte and Symphony.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;p&gt;The firm behind Ceed also hosts &lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/"&gt;The Security Podcast of Silicon Valley&lt;/a&gt;, 98 conversations since 2021 with the people who build and run security. Three of them are with people who run the kind of firm this post is about.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="show"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;7&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/7-michael-brooks-vciso-and-director-of-cyber-risk-services-at/"&gt;Michael Brooks, vCISO and Director of Cyber Risk Services at Trava&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;August 2021 · The fractional CISO model, from someone who runs it. The kind of practice Ceed starts with.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;14&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/14-biff-clark-cybersecurity-specialist-and-owner-of-coefficient-of/"&gt;Biff Clark, owner of Coefficient Technologies&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;March 2022 · Fifteen years of running a small security consultancy, the business side included.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;span class="ep"&gt;80&lt;/span&gt;&lt;div&gt;&lt;a href="https://ysecurity.io/podcast/80-think-like-a-hacker-why-curiosity-drives-innovation-and-security/"&gt;Ted Harrington, author of Hackable and a partner at Independent Security Evaluators&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;October 2025 · On the mindset that improves systems rather than exploiting them.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Two other shows have said in public what we learned in private. &lt;a href="https://www.thesoulofenterprise.com/tsoe/timesheets"&gt;The Soul of Enterprise&lt;/a&gt;, Ron Baker and Ed Kless, spent an episode in September 2016 on trashing the timesheet, which is where the sentence about management above comes from. &lt;a href="https://www.parakeeto.com/blog/from-losing-money-to-strong-profits-real-case-client-study-with-carson-pierce-ep-206/"&gt;The Agency Profit Podcast&lt;/a&gt;, from Parakeeto, walked through a real agency in November 2025 whose revenue was almost entirely going to pay its own people, and whose first fixes were getting the team to log time and counting account management as delivery. And the advice at Y Combinator’s Startup School is the one we followed without knowing it: notice the problem you have yourself, and check that other people have it too.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figure class="vid"&gt;&lt;p&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Th8JoIan4dg"&gt;Watch the recording on YouTube.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;figcaption&gt;How to Get and Evaluate Startup Ideas. Jared Friedman, Y Combinator Startup School, 32 min, published 17 November 2022, 1.6 million views. &lt;a href="https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Th8JoIan4dg"&gt;Watch on YouTube&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;/figcaption&gt;&lt;/figure&gt;&lt;h2 id="the-books"&gt;What the books say.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;p&gt;Seven books for the owner of a firm that sells its team’s time, in the order we wish we had read them.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;ul class="books"&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0887307280"&gt;The E-Myth Revisited&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Michael E. Gerber, 1995. Why the technician who starts a firm ends up running it from a spreadsheet, and what a system is for. The first book most consultancy founders are handed, for a reason.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/1492180742"&gt;The Mom Test&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Rob Fitzpatrick, 2013. How to find out whether other people have your problem without leading them. The questions to ask before you build anything.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0307463745"&gt;Rework&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Jason Fried and David Heinemeier Hansson, 2010. Scratch your own itch, and the short chapter on why estimates are guesses.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0684834316"&gt;Managing the Professional Service Firm&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;David H. Maister, 1993. The book on how a firm that sells time actually makes money, including the arithmetic every owner should know on how hours worked become hours billed.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0470584610"&gt;Implementing Value Pricing&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Ronald J. Baker, 2010. The case against the hour from the man who has made it longest. Read it to understand what the price should be, then keep the record anyway.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/B011T6SNA2"&gt;Built to Sell&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;John Warrillow, 2011. Why a firm that lives in the owner’s head is worth nothing to anyone else, and what a buyer wants to see in the record.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href="https://www.amazon.com/dp/0358213258"&gt;Company of One&lt;/a&gt;&lt;span&gt;Paul Jarvis, 2019. Staying small on purpose, which only works if the small firm’s hours are counted.&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;&lt;p&gt;Ceed is for firms that sell their team’s time: &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-cfo"&gt;fractional CFO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;CISO&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/fractional-executives"&gt;CMO and CTO practices&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/security"&gt;security&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/software"&gt;engineering boutiques&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/consulting"&gt;consultancies&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/industries/agencies"&gt;agencies&lt;/a&gt; up to fifty people. If your firm sells its team’s time and finds out about the budget when it writes the invoice, sign up and see the product with your own numbers. Nothing to pay until your first invoice.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;h2 id="questions"&gt;Questions.&lt;/h2&gt;&lt;div class="faq"&gt;&lt;details name="q" open&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What is over-servicing?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Over-servicing is work a client did not pay for that the firm never decided to give away: the extra hours logged under a fixed fee, the revision that was out of scope, the incident handled at 2 a.m. and never billed. Time-tracking vendors call the same gap time leakage, “any billable work that goes unrecorded, miscategorized, or never appears on an invoice.”&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Why do firms find out about an over-budget month at the invoice?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Because the budget lives in a spreadsheet or a report and the hours arrive later, from memory. Nothing checks the hour against the budget at the moment it is logged, so the first place the two numbers meet is the invoice. In Magnetic’s benchmark of 104 agencies, 57% said they get no warning before a budget is exceeded.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;What does it mean to hold an hour?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;The hour that would push a client over budget is saved, marked as held, and put in front of a named person for a yes or a no the moment it is logged. Approved, it goes on the invoice at the rate in the agreement. Declined, it stays on the record and off the invoice. Either way the hour and the decision survive, which is the whole of &lt;a href="https://ceed.so/blog/held-not-hidden"&gt;Held. Not hidden.&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;Why not stop tracking time, as the pricing experts advise?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;Because the hours are the firm’s cost whether or not they are the client’s price. Jonathan Stark, Ron Baker and Blair Enns are right that the hour is the wrong thing to sell. They also concede, in the recordings above, that a firm whose costs are out of control needs to count them. A flat fee with no record of the hours behind it is a bet the owner cannot check until the month closes. Ceed lets a firm price however it likes and still counts every hour against the budget the fee was sized with, at the moment it is logged.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;details name="q"&gt;&lt;summary&gt;How accurate is a timesheet filled in at the end of the week?&lt;/summary&gt;&lt;p&gt;About half right. Accelo’s 2014 survey of more than 500 professionals found daily loggers 66% accurate, weekly loggers 47% and less-than-weekly loggers 35%, with daily logging cutting lost time from 23% to under 5%. That is why Ceed asks for the hours the day after they are worked, with one Slack message a day, and why the budget is checked at entry rather than at the close.&lt;/p&gt;&lt;/details&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</content>
  </entry>
</feed>
